Rosemount RMCT Wireless Pressure Transmitter User Manual 2051 Wireless revAA

Rosemount Inc Wireless Pressure Transmitter 2051 Wireless revAA

User Manual

Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAJune 2012Rosemount 2051 Wireless SeriesPressure, Level, and Flow Solutions with WirelessHART™ Protocol
Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AATitle PageJune 2012iRosemount 2051 Wireless Series Scalable Pressure, Flow, and Level SolutionsRead this manual before working with the product. For personal and system safety, and for optimum product performance, make sure you thoroughly understand the contents before installing, using, or maintaining this product.For technical assistance, contacts are listed below:Customer CentralTechnical support, quoting, and order-related questions.United States - 1-800-999-9307 (7:00 am to 7:00 pm CST) Asia Pacific- 65 777 8211Europe/ Middle East/ Africa - 49 (8153) 9390North American Response CenterEquipment service needs.1-800-654-7768 (24 hours—includes Canada)Outside of these areas, contact your local Rosemount® representative.The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified applications. Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require nuclear-qualified hardware or products may cause inaccurate readings.For information on Rosemount nuclear-qualified products, contact your local Rosemount Sales Representative.
iiReference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AATitle PageJune 2012Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or serious injury:Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation.Explosions could result in death or serious injury: Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review the approvals section of this manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation. Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, ensure the instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices. Verify that the operating atmosphere of the transmitter is consistent with the appropriate hazardous locations certifications.Process leaks could result in death or serious injury. Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.Do not attempt to loosen or remove process connectors while the transmitter is in service.Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock.The Rosemount 2051 and all other wireless devices should be installed only after the Smart Wireless Gateway has been installed and is functioning properly. Wireless devices should also be powered up in order of proximity from the Smart Wireless Gateway, beginning with the closest. This will result in a simpler and faster network installation.Shipping considerations for wireless products (Lithium Batteries: Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF):The unit was shipped to you without the Power Module installed. Please remove the Power Module from the unit prior to shipping.Primary lithium batteries are regulated in transportation by the U. S. Department of Transportation, and are also covered by IATA (International Air Transport Association), ICAO (International Civil Aviation Organization), and ARD (European Ground Transportation of Dangerous Goods). It is the responsibility of the shipper to ensure compliance with these or any other local requirements. Please consult current regulations and requirements before shipping.Using the Rosmeount 3051 Wireless Pressure Transmitter in a manner other than what is specified by the menufacturer may impair the protection provided by the equipment.
iiiReference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AATable of ContentsJune 2012Table of Contents 1Section 1: Introduction1.1 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.2 Models Covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.3 Service Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21.4 Product Recycling/Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2Section 2: Configuration2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52.2 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52.2.1 Warnings (). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62.3 Required Bench Top Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62.3.1 Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62.4 Device Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72.4.1 Join Device to Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72.4.2 Configure Update Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82.4.3 Remove Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82.5 Review Configuration Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92.5.1 Review Pressure Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92.5.2 Review Device Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92.5.3 Review Sensor Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112.5.4 Review Radio Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112.6 Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132.7 Check Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142.7.1 Operating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142.8 Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142.8.1 Set Process Variable Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142.8.2 Set Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162.8.3 Damping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172.8.4 Write Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172.9 LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182.9.1 LCD Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182.10Detailed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192.10.1Configure Process Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192.10.2Sensor Temperature Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202.11Diagnostics and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202.11.1Master Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Contents
ivReference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AATable of ContentsJune 2012Table of Contents2.11.2Join Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202.11.3Number of Available Neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.12Advanced Functions for HART Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222.12.1Saving, Recalling, and Cloning Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3Section 3: Installation3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253.2 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253.2.1 Warnings (). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263.3 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273.3.2 Wireless. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273.3.3 Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273.3.4 Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283.4 Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293.4.1 Mount the Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293.4.2 Process Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323.4.3 Consider Housing Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343.4.4 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343.4.5 Power Module Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353.4.6 Installing the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353.5 Rosemount 304, 305 and 306 Integral Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363.5.1 Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold Installation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 373.5.2 Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold Installation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 373.5.3 Rosemount 304 Conventional Manifold Installation Procedure. . . . . . . . 383.5.4 Manifold Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 4Section 4: Commissioning4.1 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434.1.1 Warnings (). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434.2 Network Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444.3 Verify Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 5Section 5: Operation and Maintenance5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475.2 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475.2.1 Sensor Trim overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
vReference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AATable of ContentsJune 2012Table of Contents5.2.2 Zero Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495.2.3 Sensor Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495.2.4 Recall Factory Trim—Sensor Trim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505.2.5 Line Pressure Effect (Range 2 and Range 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505.2.6 Compensating for Line Pressure (Range 4 and Range 5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505.3 LCD Screen Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535.3.1 Startup Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535.3.2 Diagnostic button screen sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555.3.3 Network diagnostic status screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565.3.4 Device Diagnostic Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 6Section 6: Troubleshooting6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636.2 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636.2.1 Warnings (). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636.3 Disassembly Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676.3.1 Remove from Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676.3.2 Remove Feature Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686.4 Reassembly Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696.4.1 Reassemble the Process Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 AAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataA.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71A.2 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71A.3 Functional Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75A.3.1 Range and Sensor Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75A.4 Physical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79A.5 Dimensional Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83A.6 Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85A.6.1 Options (Include with selected model number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86A.6.2 Options (Include with selected model number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93A.6.3 Options (Include with selected model number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98A.6.4 Options (Include with selected model number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105A.6.5 Options (Include with selected model number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110A.6.6 Options (Include with selected model number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 BAppendix B: Product CertificationsB.1 Wireless Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
viReference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AATable of ContentsJune 2012Table of ContentsB.1.1 Approved manufacturing locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119B.1.2 European directive information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119B.1.3 Telecommunication compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119B.1.4 FCC and IC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119B.1.5 Ordinary location certification for FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119B.1.6 North American certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120B.1.7 CSA - Canadian Standards Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120B.1.8 European certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120B.1.9 Japanese Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121B.1.10China (NEPSI) Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 1: IntroductionJune 20121IntroductionSection 1 IntroductionUsing This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1Models Covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1Service Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2Product Recycling/Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 31.1 Using This ManualThe sections in this manual provide information on installing, operating, and maintaining the Rosemount 2051 Wireless pressure transmitter with WirelessHART™ protocol. The sections are organized as follows:Section 2: Configuration provides instruction on commissioning and operating 2051 Wireless transmitters. Information on software functions, configuration parameters, and online variables is also included. Section 3: Installation contains mechanical and electrical installation instructions.Section 4: Commissioning contains techniques for properly commissioning the device.Section 5: Operation and Maintenance contains operation and maintenance techniques.Section 6: Troubleshooting provides troubleshooting techniques for the most common operating problems. Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data supplies reference and specification data, as well as ordering information.Appendix B: Product Certifications contains approval information.1.2 Models CoveredThe following Rosemount 2051 Pressure Transmitters are covered by this manual:Rosemount 2051CD Differential Pressure TransmitterMeasures differential pressure up to 2000 psi (137,9 bar).Rosemount 2051CG Gage Pressure TransmitterMeasures gage pressure up to 2000 psi (137,9 bar).
2Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 1: IntroductionJune 2012IntroductionRosemount 2051CA Absolute Pressure TransmitterMeasures absolute pressure up to 4000 psia (275,8 bar).Rosemount 2051T Gage and Absolute Pressure TransmitterMeasures gage pressure up to 10000 psi (689,5 bar).Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level TransmitterProvides precise level and specific gravity measurements up to 300 psi (20,7 bar) for a wide variety of tank configurations.1.3 Service SupportTo expedite the return process outside of the United States, contact the nearest Emerson Process Management representative.Within the United States, call the Emerson Process Management Instrument and Valves Response Center using the 1-800-654-RSMT (7768) toll-free number. This center, available 24 hours a day, will assist you with any needed information or materials.The center will ask for product model and serial numbers, and will provide a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number. The center will also ask for the process material to which the product was last exposed.Individuals who handle products exposed to a hazardous substance can avoid injury if they are informed of and understand the hazard. If the product being returned was exposed to a hazardous substance as defined by OSHA, a copy of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each hazardous substance identified must be included with the returned goods.Shipping considerations for wireless products (Lithium Batteries: Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF):The unit was shipped to you without the Power Module installed. Please remove the Power Module from the unit prior to shipping.Primary lithium batteries (charged or discharged) are regulated in transportation by the U. S. Department of Transportation, and are also covered by IATA (International Air Transport Association), ICAO (International Civil Aviation Organization), and ARD (European Ground Transportation of Dangerous Goods). It is the responsibility of the shipper to ensure compliance with these or any other local requirements. Please consult current regulations and requirements before shipping.
3Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 1: IntroductionJune 2012IntroductionThe Power Module contains one “D” size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF). Each Power Module contains approximately 5 grams of lithium. Under normal conditions, the Power Module materials are self-contained and are not reactive as long as the batteries and the module integrity are maintained. Care should be taken to prevent thermal, electrical or mechanical damage. Contacts should be protected to prevent premature discharge. Power Module hazards remain when cells are discharged.Power Module should be stored in a clean and dry area. For maximum battery life, storage temperature should not exceed 30° C.Emerson Process Management Instrument and Valves Response Center representatives will explain the additional information and procedures necessary to return goods exposed to hazardous substances.1.4 Product Recycling/DisposalRecycling of equipment and packaging should be taken into consideration and disposed of in accordance with local and national legislation/regulations.
4Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 1: IntroductionJune 2012Introduction
Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 20125ConfigurationSection 2 ConfigurationOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5Required Bench Top Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6Device Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7Review Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13Check Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 18Detailed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 19Diagnostics and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 20Advanced Functions for HART Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 222.1 OverviewThis section contains information on configuration and verification that should be performed prior to installation. Field Communicator and AMS instructions are given to perform configuration functions. For convenience, Field Communicator fast key sequences are labeled “Fast Keys” for each software function below the appropriate headings.Example Software Function2.2 Safety MessagesProcedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.Fast Keys 1, 2, 3, etc.
6Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.2.1 Warnings ( )2.3 Required Bench Top ConfigurationBench top configuration requires a Field Communicator, AMS, or any WirelessHART Communicator. Connect the Field Communicator leads to the terminals labeled “COMM” on the terminal block. See Figure 2-1 on page 7.Bench top configuration consists of testing the transmitter and verifying transmitter configuration data. 2051 Wireless transmitters must be configured before installation. Configuring the transmitter on the bench before installation using a Field Communicator, AMS, or any WirelessHART Communicator ensures that all network settings are working correctly.When using a Field Communicator, any configuration changes made must be sent to the transmitter by using the “Send” key (F2). AMS configuration changes are implemented when the “Apply” button is clicked.AMS Wireless ConfiguratorAMS is capable of connecting to devices either directly, using a HART modem, or wirelessly via the Smart Wireless Gateway. When configuring the device, double click the device icon or right click and select Configure.2.3.1 Connection Diagrams Bench Hook-upConnect the bench equipment as shown in Figure 2-1, and turn on the Field Communicator by pressing the ON/OFF key or log into AMS. The Field Communicator or AMS will search for a HART-compatible device and indicate when the connection is made. If the Field Communicator or AMS fail to connect, it indicates that no device was found. If this occurs, refer to Section 6: Troubleshooting.Explosions can result in death or serious injury.Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or nonincendive field wiring practices.Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock.This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: This device may not cause harmful interference this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.This device must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 20cm from all persons.
7Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012ConfigurationField Hook-upFigure 2-1 illustrates the wiring for a field hook-up with a Field Communicator or AMS. The Field Communicator or AMS may be connected at “COMM” on the transmitter terminal block.Figure 2-1. Field Communicator ConnectionFor HART communication, a 2051 WirelessHART DD is required.2.4 Device Network Configuration2.4.1 Join Device to NetworkIn order to communicate with the Smart Wireless Gateway, and ultimately the Host System, the transmitter must be configured to communicate over the wireless network. This step is the wireless equivalent of connecting wires from a transmitter to the host system. 1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 1: Guided Setup.3. Select 1: Join Device to Network.Using a Field Communicator or AMS, enter the Network ID and Join Key so that they match the Network ID and Join Key of the Smart Wireless Gateway and other devices in the network. If the Network ID and Join Key are not identical to those set in the Gateway, the transmitter will not communicate with the network. The Network ID and Join Key may be obtained from the Smart Wireless Gateway on the Setup>Network>Settings page on the web server.Fast Keys 2, 1, 1
8Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.4.2 Configure Update RateThe Update Rate is the frequency at which a new measurement is taken and transmitted over the wireless network. This by default is 1 minute. This may be changed at commissioning, or at any time via AMS Wireless Configurator. The Update Rate is user selectable from 8 seconds to 60 minutes. 1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 1: Guided Setup.3. Select 2: Configure Update Rate.When device configuration is completed, remove the Power Module and replace the housing cover. Tighten the cover so that metal contacts metal.2.4.3 Remove Power ModuleAfter the sensor and network have been configured, remove the Power Module and replace the housing cover. The Power Module should be inserted only when the device is ready to be commissioned.Use caution when handling the Power Module. The Power Module may be damaged if dropped from heights in excess of 20 ft.Fast Keys 2, 1, 2
9Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.5 Review Configuration DataThe following is a list of factory default configurations that can be viewed by using the Field Communicator or AMS. Follow the steps below to review the transmitter configuration information.NoteInformation and procedures in this section that make use of Field Communicator fast key sequences and AMS assume that the transmitter and communication equipment are connected, powered, and operating correctly.2.5.1 Review Pressure InformationTo view pressure information:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 2: Pressure.4. Select from the corresponding number to view each field:2.5.2 Review Device InformationTo view device information:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 4: Device Information.4. Select 3: Device.5. Select from the corresponding number to view each field:Fast Keys 2, 2, 21Unit2Transfer Function3Damping4Upper Range Value5Lower Range Value6Maximum7Minimum8Minimum SpanFast Keys 2, 2, 4, 31Manufacturer2Model
10Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration3Final Assembly Number4Universal5Field Device6Software7Hardware8Descriptor9Message10 Date11 Model Number I12 Model Number II13 Model Number III14 SI Unit Restriction15 Country16 Device ID
11Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.5.3 Review Sensor InformationTo view sensor information:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 4: Device Information.4. Select 4: Sensor.5. Select from the corresponding number to view each field:2.5.4 Review Radio InformationTo view radio information:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 4: Device Information.4. Select 5: Radio.5. Select from the corresponding number to view each field:Fast Keys 2, 2, 4, 41Measurement Type2Module Type3Module Serial Number4Sensor Materials• Isolator Material• Fill Fluid5Process Connector• Connector Type• Connector Material•O Ring Material•Drain Vent Material6Remote Seal•Number of Seals•Seal Type• Diaphragm Material• Seal Fill FluidFast Keys 2, 2, 4, 51Manufacturer
12Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2Device Type3Device Revision4Software Revision5Hardware Revision
13Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.6 Field Communicator1. Overview2. Configure3. Service Tools1. Active Alerts2. Communication Status3. Pressure4. Pressure Status5. Last Update Time1. Join Device to Network2. Configure Update Rate3. Zero Trim4. Configure Device Display5. Configure Process Alarms6. Basic Setup1. Guided Setup2. Manual Setup3. Alert Setup1. Wireless2. Pressure3. Device Temperatures4. Device Information5. Device Display6. Other 1. Network ID2. Join Device to Network3. Broadcast Rates4. Configure Broadcast Power Level5. Power Mode6. Power Source 1. Unit2. Transfer Function3. Damping4. Upper Range Value5. Lower Range Value6. Maximum7. Minimum8. Minimum Span9. Range Using Applied Value1. Sensor Temperature2. Electronics Temperature1. Unit2. Maximum 3. Minimum1. HI-HI Alarm2. HI Alarm3. LO Alarm4. LO-LO Alarm1. Configure LO-LO Alarm2. Mode3. Variable4. Alarm Direction5. Alarm Limit6. Dead Band1. Configure LO Alarm2. Mode3. Variable4. Alarm Direction5. Alarm Limit6. Dead Band1. Configure HI-HI Alarm2. Mode3. Variable4. Alarm Direction5. Alarm Limit6. Dead Band1. Configure HI Alarm2. Mode3. Variable4. Alarm Direction5. Alarm Limit6. Dead Band1. Mode2. Display Options1. Measurement and Status Log 1. Alerts2. Variables3. Communications4. Routine Maintenance5. Simulate1. Active Alerts2. History1. Percent of Range2. Pressure3. Pressure Status4. Sensor Temperature5. Sensor Temperature Status6. Electronics Temperature7. Electronics Temp Status8. Supply Voltage9. Supply Voltage Status10. Last Update Time1. Join Status2. Communication Status3. Join Mode4. Number of Available Neighbors 5. Number of Advertisements Heard6. Number of Join Attempts1. Sensor Calibration2. Other1. Current Lower Trim2. Current Upper Trim3. Zero Sensor Trim4. Lower Sensor Trim5. Upper Sensor Trim6. Recall Factory Trim1. Master Reset2. Measurement History3. Advertise to New Devices1. Pressure2. Sensor Temperature3. Electronics Temperature4. Supply Voltage1. Tag2. Long Tag3. Device4. Sensor5. Radio6. Write Protect1. Manufacturer2. Model3. Final Assembly Number4. Universal5. Field Device6. Software7. Hardware8. Descriptor9. Message10. Date11. Model Number I12. Model Number II13. Model Number III14. SI Unit Restriction15. Country16. Device ID1. Measurement Type2. Module Type3. Module Serial Number4. Sensor Materials5. Process Connector6. Remote Seal1. Isolator Fluid2. Fill Fluid1. Number of Seals2. Seal Type3. Diaphragm Material4. Seal Fill Fluid1. Connector Type2. Connector Material3. O Ring Material4. Drain Vent Material1. Manufacturer2. Device Type3. Device Revision4. Software Revision5. Hardware Revision1. Configure Update Rate2. Message 13. Message 2
14Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.7 Check OutputBefore performing other transmitter operations, ensure that the transmitter is operating properly by checking the operating parameters.2.7.1 Operating ParametersThe pressure output value in both engineering units and percent of range will reflect the applied pressure even when the applied pressure is outside of the configured range as long as the applied pressure is between the upper and lower range limit of the transmitter. For example, if a Range 2 2051T (LRL = 0 psi, URL = 150 psi) is ranged from 0 to 100 psi, an applied pressure of 150 psi will return a % of range output of 150% and an engineering output of 150 psi.To view the Operating Parameters menu:1. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.2. Select 2: Variables.The Operating Parameters menu displays the following information pertaining to the device:Percent of RangePressurePressure StatusSensor TemperatureSensor Temperature StatusElectronics TemperatureElectronics Temperature StatusSupply VoltageSupply Voltage StatusLast Update Time2.8 Basic Setup2.8.1 Set Process Variable UnitThe PV Unit command sets the process variable units to allow you to monitor your process using the appropriate units of measure. To select a unit of measure for the PV:Fast Keys 3, 2Fast Keys 2, 2, 2, 1
15Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 2: Pressure.4. Select 1: Unit to select from the following engineering units:inH2Obar torrinHg mbar atmftH2Og/cm2MPammH2Okg/cm2inH2O at 4 °CmmHg Pa mmH2O at 4 °Cpsi kPa 
16Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.8.2 Set Transfer FunctionThe 2051 Wireless has two output settings: Linear and Square Root. Activate the square root output option to make output proportional to flow. As input approaches zero, the 2051 Wireless automatically switches to linear output in order to ensure a more smooth, stable output near zero (see Figure 2-2).From 0 to 0.6 percent of the ranged pressure input, the slope of the curve is unity (y = x). This allows accurate calibration near zero. Greater slopes would cause large changes in output (for small changes at input). From 0.6 percent to 0.8 percent, curve slope equals 42 (y = 42x) to achieve continuous transition from linear to square root at the transition point.To select the output transfer function:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 2: Pressure.4. Select 2: Transfer Function and choose either Linear or Square Root.Figure 2-2. Square Root Output Transition PointFast Keys 2, 2, 2, 2Sq. Root CurveTransition PointLinear SectionSlope=1Slope=42Transition PointSq. Root CurveFull Scale Flow (%)
17Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.8.3 DampingThe Damping command introduces a delay in processing which increases the response time of the transmitter; smoothing variations in output readings caused by rapid input changes. In the 2051 Wireless pressure transmitter, damping only takes effect when the device is placed in high power refresh mode and during calibration. In normal power mode, the effective damping is 0. Note that when the device is in high power refresh mode, battery power will be depleted rapidly. Determine the appropriate damp setting based on the necessary response time, signal stability, and other requirements of the loop dynamics of your system. The damping value of your device is user selectable from 0 to 25.6 seconds. To determine the current damping value:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 2: Pressure.4. Select 3: Damping.2.8.4 Write ProtectThe 2051 Wireless has a software write protect security feature.The view write protect security settings:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 4: Device Information.4. Select 6: Write Protect.Fast Keys 2, 2, 2, 3Fast Keys 2, 2, 4, 6
18Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.9 LCD Display2.9.1 LCD Display ConfigurationThe LCD display indicates output and abbreviated diagnostic messages. NoteUse Rosemount Wireless LCD Part Number: 00753-9004-0002.The LCD display features a four-line display and a bar graph. The first line of five characters displays the output description, the second line of seven digits displays the actual value, the third line of six characters displays engineering units and the fourth line displays “Error” when the transmitter is in alarm. The LCD display can also display diagnostic messages. The bar graph represents the network connectivity status.See “LCD Screen Messages” on page 53 for more information on LCD messages.To configure LCD display options:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 1: Guided Setup.3. Select 4: Configure Device Display.Fast Keys 2, 1, 4
19Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.10 Detailed Setup2.10.1 Configure Process AlarmsAlerts allow the user to configure the transmitter to output a HART message when the configured data point is exceeded. A process alert will be transmitted continuously if the set points are exceeded and the alert mode is ON. An alert will be displayed on a Field Communicator, AMS status screen or in the error section of the LCD display. The alert will reset once the value returns within range.NoteHI alert value must be higher than the LO alert value. Both alert values must be within the pressure or temperature sensor limits.Example 1: Rising AlertExample 2: Falling AlertTo configure the process alerts, perform the following procedure:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 1: Guided Setup.3. Select 5: Configure Process Alarms and follow the on-screen instructions to complete configure of process alarms.Fast Keys 2, 1, 5DeadbandAssigned ValueAlert Set PointAlert “OFF” Alert “ON” Alert “OFF”Units of MeasurementTimeDeadbandAssigned ValueAlert Set PointAlert “OFF” Alert “ON” Alert “OFF”Units of MeasurementTime
20Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.10.2 Sensor Temperature Unit The Sensor Temperature Unit command selects between Celsius and Fahrenheit units for the sensor temperature. The sensor temperature output is accessible via HART only.To select the sensor temperature unit:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 3: Device Temperatures.4. Select 1: Sensor Temperature.5. Select 1: Unit to select from Celsius or Fahrenheit.2.11 Diagnostics and ServiceDiagnostics and service functions listed below are primarily for use after field installation. The Transmitter Test feature is designed to verify that the transmitter is operating properly, and can be performed either on the bench or in the field. 2.11.1 Master Reset The master reset function will reset the device electronics. To perform a master reset:1. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.2. Select 4: Routine Maintenance.3. Select 2: Other.4. Select 1: Master Reset.2.11.2 Join Status To view the join status of the device, perform the following procedure:1. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.2. Select 3: Communications.3. Select 1: Join Status.Fast Keys 2, 2, 3, 1, 1Fast Keys 3, 4, 2, 1Fast Keys 3, 3, 1
21Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012ConfigurationWireless devices join the secure network through a four step process:Step 1. Network FoundStep 2. Network Security Clearance GrantedStep 3. Network Bandwidth AllocatedStep 4. Network Join Complete2.11.3 Number of Available Neighbors In a self-organizing network, the more neighbors a device has, the more robust the network will be. To view the number of available neighbors for the wireless device, perform the following procedure:1. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.2. Select 3: Routine Maintenance.3. Select 4: Number of Available Neighbors.Fast Keys 3, 3, 4
22Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.12 Advanced Functions for HART Protocol2.12.1 Saving, Recalling, and Cloning Configuration DataUse the cloning feature of the Field Communicator or the AMS “User Configuration” feature to configure several 2051 Wireless transmitters similarly. Cloning involves configuring a transmitter, saving the configuration data, then sending a copy of the data to a separate transmitter. Several possible procedures exist when saving, recalling, and cloning configuration data. For complete instructions refer to the Field Communicator manual (publication no. 00809-0100-4276) or AMS Books Online. One common method is as follows:Field Communicator1. Completely configure the first transmitter.2. Save the configuration data:a. Select F2 SAVE from the Field Communicator HOME/ONLINE screen.b. Ensure that the location to which the data will be saved is set to MODULE. If it is not, select 1: Location to set the save location to MODULE.c. Select 2: Name, to name the configuration data. The default is the transmitter tag number.d. Ensure that the data type is set to STANDARD. If the data type is NOT STANDARD, select 3: Data Type to set the data type to STANDARD.e. Select F2 SAVE.3. Connect and power the receiving transmitter and Field Communicator.4. Select the back arrow from the HOME/ONLINE screen. The Field Communicator menu appears.5. Select 1: Offline, 2: Saved Configuration, 1: Module Contents to reach the MODULE CONTENTS menu.6. Use the DOWN ARROW to scroll through the list of configurations in the memory module, and use the RIGHT ARROW to select and retrieve the required configuration.7. Select 1: Edit.8. Select 1: Mark All.9. Select F2 SAVE.10. Use the DOWN ARROW to scroll through the list of configurations in the memory module, and use the RIGHT ARROW to select the configuration again.11. Select 3: Send to download the configuration to the transmitter.12. Select OK after the control loop is set to manual.13. After the configuration has been sent, select OK.Fast Keys left arrow, 1, 2
23Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012ConfigurationWhen finished, the Field Communicator informs you of the status. Repeat Steps 3 through 13 to configure another transmitter.NoteThe transmitter receiving cloned data must have the same software version (or later) as the original transmitter.AMS creating a Reusable CopyTo create a reusable copy of a configuration perform the following procedure: 1. Completely configure the first transmitter.2. Select View then User Configuration View from the menu bar (or click the toolbar button).3. In the User Configuration window, right click and select New from the context menu. 4. In the New window, select a device from the list of templates shown, and click OK.5. The template is copied into the User Configurations window, with the tag name highlighted; rename it as appropriate and press Enter.NoteA device icon can also be copied by dragging and dropping a device template or any other device icon from AMS Explorer or Device Connection View into the User Configurations window. The “Compare Configurations” window appears, showing the Current values of the copied device on one side and mostly blank fields on the other (User Configuration) side.6. Transfer values from the current configuration to the user configuration as appropriate or enter values by typing them into the available fields.7. Click Apply to apply the values, or click OK to apply the values and close the window.AMS Applying a User ConfigurationAny amount of user configurations can be created for the application. They can also be saved, and applied to connected devices or to devices in the Device List or Plant Database.To apply a user configuration perform the following procedure:1. Select the desired user configuration in the User Configurations window.2. Drag the icon onto a like device in AMS Explorer or Device Connection View. The Compare Configurations window opens, showing the parameters of the target device on one side and the parameters of the user configuration on the other.3. Transfer parameters from the user configuration to the target device as desired, Click OK to apply the configuration and close the window.
24Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration
Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 201225InstallationSection 3 InstallationOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 25Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 25Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 27Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 29Installing the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 35Rosemount 304, 305 and 306 Integral Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 363.1 OverviewThe information in this section covers installation considerations. A Quick Installation Guide (document number 00825-0100-4100) is shipped with every transmitter to describe basic installation and startup procedures. Dimensional drawings for each Rosemount 2051 Wireless variation and mounting configuration are included in Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data. Field Communicator and AMS instructions are given to perform configuration functions. For convenience, Field Communicator fast key sequences are labeled “Fast Keys” for each software function below the appropriate headings.3.2 Safety MessagesProcedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operation. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated with a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
26Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012Installation3.2.1 Warnings ( )Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or serious injury.Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation.Explosions can result in death or serious injury. Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review the approvals section of the 2051 Wireless reference manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation.Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices.Verify that the operating atmosphere of the transmitter is consistent with the appropriate hazardous locations certifications.Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage may be present on leads can cause electrical shock.Process leaks could result in death or serious injury. Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.Do not attempt to loosen or remove process connectors while the transmitter is in service.Replacement equipment or spare parts not approved by Rosemount Inc. for use as spare parts could reduce the pressure retaining capabilities of the transmitter and may render the instrument dangerous. Use only bolts supplied or sold by Rosemount Inc. as spare parts.Improper assembly of manifolds to traditional flange can damage SuperModule™. For safe assembly of manifold to traditional flange, bolts must break back plane of flange web (i.e., bolt hold) but must not contact module housing.The Power Module with the wireless unit contains one “D” size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF). Each Power Module contains approximately 5 grams of lithium. Under normal conditions, the Power Module materials are self-contained and are not reactive as long as the batteries and the pack integrity are maintained. Care should be taken to prevent thermal, electrical or mechanical damage. Contacts should be protected to prevent premature discharge.
27Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012Installation3.3 Considerations3.3.1 GeneralMeasurement performance depends upon proper installation of the transmitter and impulse piping. Mount the transmitter close to the process and use a minimum of piping to achieve best performance. Also, consider the need for easy access, personnel safety, practical field calibration, and a suitable transmitter environment. Install the transmitter to minimize vibration, shock, and temperature fluctuation.3.3.2 WirelessPower Up SequenceThe Power Module should not be installed on any wireless device until the Smart Wireless Gateway is installed and functioning properly. Wireless devices should also be powered up in order of proximity from the Smart Wireless Gateway beginning with the closest. This will result in a simpler and faster network installation. Enable High Speed Operation on the Gateway to ensure that new devices join the network faster. For more information see the Smart Wireless Gateway Manual (Doc. No. 00809-0200-4420).Field Communicator ConnectionsIn order for the Field Communicator to interface with the 2051, the Power Module must be connected.Figure 3-1. Field Communicator Connections3.3.3 Mechanical NoteFor steam service or for applications with process temperatures greater than the limits of the transmitter, do not blow down impulse piping through the transmitter. Flush lines with the blocking valves closed and refill lines with water before resuming measurement.NoteWhen the transmitter is mounted on its side, position the Coplanar flange to ensure proper venting or draining. Mount the flange as shown in Figure 3.4.2 on page 32, keeping drain/vent connections on the bottom for gas service and on the top for liquid service.
28Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012Installation3.3.4 Environmental Access requirements and cover installation on page 29 can help optimize transmitter performance. Mount the transmitter to minimize ambient temperature changes, vibration, mechanical shock, and to avoid external contact with corrosive materials. Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data lists temperature operating limits.Figure 3-2. Installation FlowchartSTART HEREBench Calibration? Field InstallNoConfigure(Section 2)Set UnitsSet Range PointsSet Network ParametersVerifyApply PressureYesWithinSpecifications? YesNoRefer toSection 4 Operation and MaintenanceCheck Switches (page 34)Mount Transmitter(page 29)Install Power Module(pages 35–34)Check Process Connection(page 32)Trim Transmitter for Mounting Effects(page 48)DoneReview Transmitter Configuration(page 7)Confirm Transmitter Configuration(page 7)
29Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012Installation3.4 Installation ProceduresFor dimensional drawing information refer to “Dimensional Drawings” on page 83.Process Flange OrientationMount the process flanges with sufficient clearance for process connections. For safety reasons, place the drain/vent valves so the process fluid is directed away from possible human contact when the vents are used. In addition, consider the need for a testing or calibration input.Housing RotationSee “Consider Housing Rotation” on page 34.Power Module Side of Electronics HousingMount the transmitter so the Power Module side is accessible. Clearance of 2.75-in. (70 mm) is required for cover removal. Circuit Side of Electronics HousingProvide 0.75 in. (19 mm) of clearance for units with out an LCD display. Three inches of clearance is required for cover removal if a meter is installed.Cover InstallationAlways ensure a proper seal by installing the electronics housing cover(s) so that polymer contacts polymer. Use Rosemount O-rings.3.4.1 Mount the TransmitterMounting BracketsFacilitate mounting transmitter to a 2-in. pipe, or to a panel. The B4 Bracket (SST) option is standard for use with the Coplanar and In-Line flanges. “Coplanar Flange Mounting Configura-tions” on page 83 shows bracket dimensions and mounting configurations for the B4 option.Options B1–B3 and B7–B9 are sturdy, epoxy/polyester-painted brackets designed for use with the traditional flange. The B1–B3 brackets have carbon steel bolts, while the B7–B9 brackets have stainless steel bolts. The BA and BC brackets and bolts are stainless steel. The B1/B7/BA and B3/B9/BC style brackets support 2-inch pipe-mount installations, and the B2/B8 style brackets support panel mounting.NoteMost transmitters are calibrated in the horizontal position. Mounting the transmitter in any other position will shift the zero point to the equivalent amount of liquid head caused by the varied mounting position. To reset zero point, refer to “Sensor Trim” on page 49.Position the antenna such that it is vertical, typically straight up (antenna may be pointed down as well.)
30Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012InstallationFlange BoltsThe 2051 can be shipped with a Coplanar flange or a Traditional flange installed with four 1.75-inch flange bolts. Mounting bolts and bolting configurations for the Coplanar and Traditional flanges can be found on page 2-6, 7. Stainless steel bolts supplied by Emerson Process Management are coated with a lubricant to ease installation. Carbon steel bolts do not require lubrication. No additional lubricant should be applied when installing either type of bolt. Bolts supplied by Emerson Process Management are identified by their head markings:Bolt InstallationOnly use bolts supplied with the Rosemount 2051 or sold by Emerson Process Management as spare parts. When installing the transmitter to one of the optional mounting brackets, torque the bolts to 125 in-lb. (0,9 N-m). Use the following bolt installation procedure:1. Finger-tighten the bolts.2. Torque the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossing pattern.3. Torque the bolts to the final torque value using the same crossing pattern.Torque values for the flange and manifold adapter bolts are as follows:Table 3-1. Bolt InstallationTorque ValuesBolt Material Initial Torque Value Final Torque ValueCS-ASTM-A445 Standard 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 650 in.-lb (73 N-m)316 SST—Option L4 150 in.-lb (17 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m)ASTM-A-193-B7M—Option L5 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 650 in.-lb (73 N-m)Alloy K-500—Option L6 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 650 in.-lb (73 N-m)ASTM-A-453-660—Option L7 150 in.-lb (17 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m)ASTM-A-193-B8M—Option L8 150 in.-lb (17 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m)Carbon Steel (CS) Head MarkingsB7M316 B8M F593_Stainless Steel (SST) Head Markings* The last digit in the F593_ head marking may be any letter between A and M.F593_KM660 CL AAlloy K-500 Head Marking
31Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012InstallationImpulse PipingThe piping between the process and the transmitter must accurately transfer the pressure to obtain accurate measurements. There are five possible sources of error: leaks, friction loss (particularly if purging is used), trapped gas in a liquid line, liquid in a gas line, and density variations between the legs.The best location for the transmitter in relation to the process pipe depends on the process itself. Use the following guidelines to determine transmitter location and placement of impulse piping:Keep impulse piping as short as possible.For liquid service, slope the impulse piping at least 1 inch per foot (8 cm per m) upward from the transmitter toward the process connection.For gas service, slope the impulse piping at least 1 inch per foot (8 cm per m) downward from the transmitter toward the process connection.Avoid high points in liquid lines and low points in gas lines.Make sure both impulse legs are the same temperature.Use impulse piping large enough to avoid friction effects and blockage.Vent all gas from liquid piping legs.When using a sealing fluid, fill both piping legs to the same level.When purging, make the purge connection close to the process taps and purge through equal lengths of the same size pipe. Avoid purging through the transmitter.Keep corrosive or hot (above 250 °F [121 °C]) process material out of direct contact with the SuperModule and flanges.Prevent sediment deposits in the impulse piping.Keep the liquid head balanced on both legs of the impulse piping.Avoid conditions that might allow process fluid to freeze within the process flange.
53Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and Maintenance5.3 LCD Screen Messages5.3.1 Startup Screen SequenceThe following screens will display when the Power Module is first connected to the Rosemount 2051 Wireless. All Segments On: used to visually determine if there are any bad segments on the LCDDevice Identification: used to determine Device Type.Device Information - Tag: user entered tag which is eight characters long - will not display if all characters are blankPV Screen - process pressureX X X X XX X X X x x xx x x x x x 3 0 5 1 W I r e l sA b c d e f g hP R E S S 5 8. 0 P S I
54Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceSV Screen - sensor temperature valueTV Screen - device temperature valueQV Screen - voltage reading at the power supply terminalsPercent Range Screen - percent range readingAlert Screen - at least one alert is present - this screen will not display if no alerts are presentS N S R 2 5. 0 0d e g c D E V 2 5. 2 5d e g cS u p l y 7. 2 1v o l t sP R C N T 7. 2 1R A N G Ea l e r t p r e s n t
55Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and Maintenance5.3.2 Diagnostic button screen sequenceThe following five screens will display when the device is operating properly and the Diagnostic Button has been pressed.Device Information - Tag: user entered tag which is eight characters long - will not display if all characters are blankDevice Identification: used to determine Device IDDiagnostic Button Screen 3: assuming the device has the correct join key, this ID tells the user what network the device can connect withDiagnostic Button Screen 4: the device has joined a network and has been fully configured and has multiple parentsA b c d e f g hi d - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8n e t w k 13 0 5 I Dn e t w k O K
56Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and Maintenance5.3.3 Network diagnostic status screensThese screens display the network status of the device. Only one will be shown during the startup sequence or diagnostic sequence.Diagnostic Button Screen 5: voltage reading at the power supply terminalsDiagnostic Button Screen 4.1: the device is attempting to start the radioDiagnostic Button Screen 4.2: the device has just restartedDiagnostic Button Screen 4.3: the device is starting to join the processS u p l y 7. 2 1v o l t sn e t w k u n k n w nn e t w k I N I Tn e t w k i d l e
57Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceDiagnostic Button Screen 4.4: the device is in a disconnected state and requires a “Force Join” command to join the networkDiagnostic Button Screen 4.5: the device is searching for the NetworkDiagnostic Button Screen 4.6: the device is attempting to join a networkDiagnostic Button Screen 4.7: the device is connected to the Network, but is in a “Quarantined” stateDiagnostic Button Screen 4.8: the device is joined and operational, but is running with limited bandwidth for sending periodic datan e t w k D I S C N TN E T w K S R C H N Gn e t w k N E G O Tn e t w k c o n e c tn e t w kL I M - O P
58Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceDiagnostic Button Screen 4.9: the device has joined a network and has been fully configured and has multiple parentsn e t w k O K
59Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and Maintenance5.3.4 Device Diagnostic ScreensThe following screens will show the device diagnostics depending on the state of the device.Device Information - Status: there is a critical error which may prevent the device from operating correctly. Check additional status screens for more information.PV Screen - process pressure value SV Screen - sensor temperature valueTV Screen - device temperature value D E V f A i l u rP R E S S 5 8. 0 P S IS N S R 2 5. 0 0d e g c D E V 2 5. 2 5d e g c
60Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceQV Screen - voltage reading at the power supply terminalsPercent Range Screen - percent range readingAlert Screen - at least one alert is present - this screen will not display if no alerts are presentDiagnostic Button Screen 1 - Tag: user entered tag which is eight characters long - will not display if all characters are blankDiagnostic Button Screen 2: the device’s identifier that is used to make up the HART long address - the Smart Wireless Gateway may use this to help identify devices if no unique user tag is availableS u p l y 7. 2 1v o l t sP R C N T 7. 2 1R A N G Ea l e r t p r e s n tA b c d e f g hi d - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
61Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceDiagnostic Button Screen 7.1: the terminal voltage has dropped below level of operating limit. Replace the Power Module (Part Number: 701PGNKF)Diagnostic Button Screen 7.2: the terminal voltage is below the recommended operating range - if this is a battery operated device, the Power Module should be replaced - for line powered devices, the supply voltage should be increasedDiagnostic Button Screen 8: the device may not be able to communicate with the radio or the radio has an internal error. In this state the device may still be operational and publishing HART dataDiagnostic Button Screen 9.1: configuration of the transmitter is invalid such that critical operation of the device may be affected - check the extended configuration status to identify which configuration item(s) need to be correcteds u p l y f a i l u rs u p l y l o wr a d i o f a i l u rc o n f g f a i l u r
62Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceNoteUse the Rosemount Wireless LCD Part Number: 00753-9004-0002.Diagnostic Button Screen 9.2: configuration of the transmitter is invalid such that non-critical operation of the device may be affected - check the extended configuration status to identify which configuration item(s) need to be correctedDiagnostic Button Screen 10.1: a sensor attached to the transmitter has failed, and valid readings from that sensor are no longer possible - check the sensor and sensor wiring connections - check additional status for more detailed information of the failure sourceDiagnostic Button Screen 10.2: a sensor attached to the transmitter is degraded, readings from that sensor may not be within accuracy specifications - check the process, and sensor wiring connections - check additional status for more detailed information of the warning sourcec o n f g w a r ns n s r f a i l u rs n s r w a r n
63Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 6: TroubleshootingJune 2012TroubleshootingSection 6 Troubleshooting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 63Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 63Disassembly Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 67Reassembly Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 696.1 OverviewTable 6-2 provides summarized maintenance and troubleshooting suggestions for the most common operating problems. If you suspect malfunction despite the absence of any diagnostic messages on the Field Communicator display, follow the procedures described here to verify that transmitter hardware and process connections are in good working order. Always deal with the most likely checkpoints first.6.2 Safety MessagesProcedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.6.2.1 Warnings ( )Explosions can result in death or serious injury. Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure that the instruments are installed according to intrinsically safe or nonincendive field wiring practices.Static electricity can damage sensitive components. Observe safe handling precautions for static-sensitive components.Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock.Process leaks could result in death or serious injury.Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.Do not attempt to loosen or remove process connectors while the transmitter is in service.
64Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 6: TroubleshootingJune 2012TroubleshootingTable 6-1. Rosemount 2051 Wireless Device Status InformationDevice Status Description Recommended ActionElectronics Failure An electronics error that could impact the device measement reading has occurred.1. Reset the device2. Reconfirm all configuration items in the device3. If the condition persists, replace the electronicsRadio Failure The wireless radio has detected a failure or stopped communicating.1. Reset the device2. If the condition persists, replace the electronicsSupply Voltage Failure The supply voltage is too low for the device to function properly.1. Replace the Power ModuleElectronics Warning The device has detected an electronics error that does not currently impact the device measurement reading.1. Reset the device2. Reconfirm all configuration items in the device3. If the condition persists, replace the electronicsPressure has Exceeded Limits The sensor has exceeded the maximum measurement range.1. Check process for possible saturation condition2. Verify that the appropriate sensor was chosen for the application3. Reconfirm sensor configuration4. Reset the device5. Replace the sensorElectronics Temperature has Exceeded LimitsThe electronics temperature has exceeded the transmitter's maximum range.1. Verify environmental temperature is within the transmitter’s range2. Remote mount the transmitter away from process and environmental conditions3. Reset the device4. If the condition persists, replace the electronicsSupply Voltage Low The supply voltage is low and may soon affect broadcast updates.1. Replace the Power ModuleDatabase Memory Warning The device has failed to write to the database memory. Any data written during this time may have been lost.1. Reset the device2. Reconfirm all configuration items in the device3. If logging dynamic data not needed, this advisory can be safely ignored4. If the condition persists, replace the electronics
65Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 6: TroubleshootingJune 2012TroubleshootingConfiguration Error The device has detected a configuration error based on a change to the device.1. Click on details for more information2. Correct the parameter that has a configuration error3. Reset the device4. If the condition persists, replace the electronicsHI HI Alarm The primary variable has surpassed the user defined limit.1. Verify that the process variable is within user specified limits2. Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit3. If not needed, disable this alertHI Alarm The primary variable has surpassed the user defined limit.1. Verify that the process variable is within user specified limits2. Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit3. If not needed, disable this alertLO Alarm The primary variable has surpassed the user defined limit.1. Verify that the process variable is within user specified limits2. Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit3. If not needed, disable this alertLO LO Alarm The primary variable has surpassed the user defined limit.1. Verify that the process variable is within user specified limits2. Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit3. If not needed, disable this alertButton Stuck A buttons on the Electronics Board is detected as stuck in the active position.1. Check the buttons for obstructions2. Reset the device3. If the condition persists, replace the electronicsSimulation Active The device is in simulation mode and may not be reporting actual information.1. Verify that simulation is no longer required2. Disable Simulation mode in Service Tools3. Reset the deviceDevice Status Description Recommended Action
66Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 6: TroubleshootingJune 2012TroubleshootingTable 6-2. Rosemount 2051 Wireless TroubleshootingTable 6-3. Wireless Network TroubleshootingSymptom Recommended ActionsTransmitter will not respond to changes in applied pressure Check test equipmentCheck impulse piping or manifold for blockageVerify applied pressure is within sensor limitsDigital Pressure Variable reading is low or high Check test equipment (verify accuracy)Check impulse piping for blockage or low fill in wet legVerify transmitter is calibrated properlyVerify pressure calculations for applicationDigital Pressure Variable reading is erratic Check application for faulty equipment in pressure lineVerify transmitter is not reacting directly to equipment turning on/offLCD display is not functioning Reseat the LCD according to “Installing the LCD Display” on page 35Verify that the LCD display is a wireless LCD Meter. An LCD from a wired device will not function in a wireless device. Rosemount part number: 00753-9004-0002Verify that the LCD display mode is not disabled.Symptom Recommended ActionsDevice not joining the network Verify network ID and join keyWait longer (30 min.)Enable High Speed Operation on Smart Wireless GatewayCheck Power ModuleVerify device is within range of at least one other deviceVerify network is in active network advertisePower Cycle device to try againVerify device is configured to join. Send the “Force Join” command to the deviceSee troubleshooting section of Smart Wireless Gateway for more informationShort battery life Check that “Power Always On” mode is offVerify device is not installed in extreme temperaturesVerfiy that device is not a network pinch pointCheck for excessive network rejoins due to poor connectivityLimited Bandwidth Error Reduce the Update Rate on transmitterIncrease communication paths by adding more wireless pointsCheck that device has been online for at least an hourCheck that device is not routing through a “limited” routing nodeCreate a new network with an additional Smart Wireless Gateway
67Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 6: TroubleshootingJune 2012Troubleshooting6.3 Disassembly Procedures6.3.1 Remove from ServiceBe aware of the following:Follow all plant safety rules and procedures.Isolate and vent the process from the transmitter before removing the transmitter from service.Detach the process flange by removing the four flange bolts and two alignment screws that secure it.Do not scratch, puncture, or depress the isolating diaphragms.Clean isolating diaphragms with a soft rag and a mild cleaning solution, and rinse with clear water.Whenever you remove the process flange or flange adapters, visually inspect the Teflon o-rings. Replace the o-rings if they show any signs of damage, such as nicks or cuts. If they are not damaged, reuse them.The 2051 Wireless transmitter is attached to the process connection by four bolts and two cap screws. Remove the bolts and separate the transmitter from the process connection. Leave the process connection in place and ready for re-installation.The 2051 Wireless In-line transmitter is attached to the process by a single hex nut process connection. Loosen the hex nut to separate the transmitter from the process.
68Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 6: TroubleshootingJune 2012Troubleshooting6.3.2 Remove Feature AssemblyThe Wireless Feature Board is located in the electronics compartment. To remove the assembly, perform the following procedure. 1. Remove the housing cover opposite the field terminal side.2. Remove the LCD Display, if applicable. To do this, hold in the two clips and pull outward.3. Loosen the two small screws located on the assembly.4. Replace the LCD Display. This will help in removing the assembly.5. Pull out the assembly to expose and locate the SuperModule connector and antenna connector.6. Grasp antenna connector by the base and pull upwards to disconnect.7. Grasp the SuperModule connector, squeeze the clips and pull upwards (avoid pulling wires).Figure 6-1. Sensor module connector viewWireless Housing
69Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 6: TroubleshootingJune 2012Troubleshooting6.4 Reassembly ProceduresimportantThe V-Seal must be installed at the bottom of the housing.6.4.1 Reassemble the Process Flange1. Inspect the Teflon sensor module o-rings. If the o-rings are not damaged, reuse them. Replace o-rings that show any signs of damage, such as nicks, cuts, or general wear.NoteIf you are replacing the o-rings, be careful not to scratch the o-ring grooves or the surface of the isolating diaphragm when removing the damaged o-rings.2. Install the process flange on the sensor module. To hold the process flange in place, install the two alignment screws to finger tight (screws are not pressure retaining). Do not overtighten; this will affect module-to-flange alignment.3. Install the appropriate flange bolts.a. If the installation requires a 1/4–18 NPT mounting, use four 1.75-in. flange bolts. Go to Step f.b. If the installation requires a 1/2–14 NPT mounting, use four 2.88-in. process flange/adapter bolts. For gage pressure configurations, use two 2.88-in. bolts and two 1.75-in. bolts. Go to Step d.c. If the installation uses a manifold (differential pressure applications only), use appropriate bolts. Go to Step e.d. Hold the flange adapters and adapter o-rings in place while finger-tightening the bolts. Go to Step g.e. Align the process flange with the manifold.f. Finger tighten the bolts.g. Tighten the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossed pattern. See Table 6-4 for appropriate torque values.h. Tighten the bolts to the final torque value using a crossed pattern. See Table 6-4 for appropriate torque values. When fully tightened, the bolts should extend through the top of the module housing.i. If the installation uses a manifold, then install flange adapters on the process end of the manifold using the 1.75-in. flange bolts supplied with the transmitter.
70Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AASection 6: TroubleshootingJune 2012TroubleshootingTable 6-4. Bolt InstallationTorque Values4. If you replaced the Teflon sensor module o-rings, re-torque the flange bolts after installation to compensate for cold flow.5. Install the drain/vent valve.a. Apply sealing tape to the threads on the seat. Starting at the base of the valve with the threaded end pointing toward the installer, apply two clockwise turns of sealing tape.b. Take care to place the opening on the valve so that process fluid will drain toward the ground and away from human contact when the valve is opened.c. Tighten the drain/vent valve to 250 in-lb. (28.25 N-m).NoteAfter replacing o-rings on Range 1 transmitters and re-installing the process flange, expose the transmitter to a temperature of 185 °F (85 °C) for two hours. Then re-tighten the flange bolts in a cross pattern, and again expose the transmitter to a temperature of 185 °F (85 °C) for two hours before calibration.Bolt Material Initial Torque Value Final Torque ValueCS-ASTM-A445 Standard 300 in-lb. (34 N-m) 650 in-lb. (73 N-m)316 SST—Option L4 150 in-lb. (17 N-m) 300 in-lb. (34 N-m)ASTM-A-193-B7M—Option L5300 in-lb. (34 N-m) 650 in-lb. (73 N-m)Alloy K-500—Option L6 300 in-lb. (34 N-m) 650 in-lb. (73 N-m)ASTM-A-453-660—Option L7150 in-lb. (17 N-m) 300 in-lb. (34 N-m)ASTM-A-193-B8M—Option L8150 in-lb. (17 N-m) 300 in-lb. (34 N-m)
Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 201271Specifications and Reference DataAppendix A Specifications and Reference DataPerformance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 71Functional Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 75Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 79Dimensional Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 83Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 85A.1 SpecificationsA.2 Performance SpecificationsFor zero-based spans, reference conditions, silicone oil fill, glass-filled PTFE o-rings, SST materials, Coplanar flange (2051C) or 1/2 in.- 14 NPT (2051T) process connections, digital trim values set to equal range points.Conformance to specification (±3 (Sigma))Technology leadership, advanced manufacturing techniques and statistical process control ensure specification conformance to ±3or better.Digital OutputFor wireless devices, use calibrated range in place of span.
72Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataReference Accuracy(1)Total PerformanceModels(1)(1) Total performance is determined by performing a root sum square calculation on reference accuracy, ambient temperature effect, and line pressure effect errors. For FOUNDATION fieldbus transmitters, use calibrated range in place of span. For zero based spans, reference conditions, silicone oil fill, SST materials, Coplanar flange (2051C) or 1/2 in. - 18 NPT (2051T) process connections, digital trim values set to equal range points.Standard High Accuracy Option2051CD, 2051CGRange 0 (CD) ±0.10% of spanFor spans less than 2:1, accuracy = ±0.05% of URLRange 1 ±0.10% of spanFor spans less than 15:1, accuracy =Ranges 2-5 ±0.065% of spanFor spans less than 10:1, accuracy = Ranges 2-4 High Accuracy Option, P8±0.04% of spanFor spans less than 5:1, accuracy =2051TRanges 1-4 ±0.065% of spanFor spans less than 10:1, accuracy = Ranges 1-4 High Accuracy Option, P8±0.04% of spanFor spans less than 5:1, accuracy =Range 5 ±0.075% of span2051CARanges 1-4 ±0.065% of spanFor spans less than 10:1, accuracy = Ranges 2-4 High Accuracy Option, P8±0.04% of spanFor spans less than 5:1, accuracy =2051H/2051LAll Ranges ±0.075% of spanFor spans less than 10:1, accuracy =For ±50 °F (28 °C) temperature changes, up to 1000 psi (6,9 MPa) line pressure (CD only), from 1:1 to 5:1 rangedown.Models Total Performance2051C Ranges 2-5 ±0.15% of span 2051T Ranges 1-4 ±0.15% of span 0.025 0.005+URLSpan---------------% of Span0.015 0.005+URLSpan---------------% of Span0.015 0.005+URLSpan---------------% of Span0.0075 URLSpan---------------% of Span0.0075 URLSpan---------------% of Span0.0075 URLSpan---------------% of Span0.0075 URLSpan---------------% of Span0.025 0.005+URLSpan---------------% of Span
73Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataLong Term StabilityDynamic PerformanceLine Pressure Effect per 1000 psi (6,9 MPa)(1)Models Long Term Stability2051C Ranges 2-5 ±0.125% of URL for 5 years±50 °F (28 °C) temperature changes, and up to 1000 psi (6,9 MPa) line pressure.2051CD Low/Draft Range Ranges 0-1 ±0.2% of URL for 1 year2051T Ranges 1-4 ±0.125% of URL for 5 years±50 °F (28 °C) temperature changes, and up to 1000 psi (6,9 MPa) line pressure.4 - 20 mA (HART protocol)(1)Fieldbus protocol(3) Typical HART Transmitter Response TimeTotal Response Time (Td + Tc)(2):2051C, Ranges 2-5:Range 1:Range 0:2051T:2051H/L:100 ms 255 ms700 ms100 ms Consult factory152 ms307 ms752 ms152 msConsult factoryDead Time (Td) 45 ms (nominal) 97 msUpdate Rate 22 times per second 22 times per second(1) Dead time and update rate apply to all models and ranges; analog output only(2) Nominal total response time at 75 °F (24 °C) reference conditions. (3) Transmitter fieldbus output only, segment macro-cycle not included.Models(1)(1) For zero error specifications for line pressures above 2000 psi (137,9 bar) or line pressure effect specifications for DP Ranges 4-5, see “Compensating for Line Pressure (Range 4 and Range 5)” on page 50.Line Pressure Effect2051CD Zero Error(2)±0.125% of URL/100 psi (6,89 bar)(2) Can be calibrated out at line pressure.Range 0Range 1 ±0.25% of URL/1000 psi (68,9 bar)Ranges 2-3 ±0.05% of URL/1000 psi (68,9 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 2000 psi (0 to 13,7 MPa)Range 0Span Error±0.15% of reading/100 psi (6,89 bar)Range 1 ±0.4% of reading/1000 psi (68,9 bar)Ranges 2-3 ±0.1% of reading/1000 psi (68,9 bar)2051HD Zero Error(1)±0.1% of URL/1000 psi (68,9 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 2000 psi (0 to 13,7 MPa)All RangesAll RangesSpan Error±0.1% of reading/1000 psi (68,9 bar)TcTdTd = Dead TimeTc = Time ConstantPressure ReleasedResponse Time = Td+Tc63.2% of TotalStep ChangeTime0%100%36.8%Transmitter Output vs. Time
74Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataAmbient Temperature Effect per 50°F (28°C)Mounting Position EffectsVibration EffectLess than ±0.1% of URL when tested per the requirements of IEC60770-1 field or pipeline with high vibration level (10-60 Hz 0.21mm displacement peak amplitude / 60-2000 Hz 3g).Power Supply EffectLess than ±0.005% of calibrated span per volt.Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)Meets all relevant requirements of EN 61326 and NAMUR NE-21.Transient Protection (Option Code T1)Meets IEEE C62.41, Category Location B6 kV crest (0.5 s - 100 kHz)3 kV crest (8 × 20 microseconds)6 kV crest (1.2 × 50 microseconds)Models Ambient Temperature Effect2051CD/CG Range 0 ±(0.25% URL + 0.05% span)Range 1 ±(0.1% URL + 0.25% span)Ranges 2-5 ±(0.0125% URL + 0.0625% span) from 1:1 to 5:1±(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 5:1 to 100:12051T Range 1 ±(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 1:1 to 10:1±(0.05% URL + 0.125% span) from 10:1 to 100:1Range 2-4 ±(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 1:1 to 30:1±(0.035% URL + 0.125% span) from 30:1 to 100:1Range 5 ±(0.1% URL + 0.15% span)2051CA All Ranges ±(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 1:1 to 30:1±(0.035% URL + 0.125% span) from 30:1 to 100:12051L See Rosemount Inc. Instrument Toolkit® software.Models Mounting Position Effects2051C Zero shifts up to ±1.25 inH2O (3,11 mbar), which can be calibrated out. No span effect.2051L With liquid level diaphragm in vertical plane, zero shift of up to 1 inH2O (2,49 mbar). With diaphragm in horizontal plane, zero shift of up to 5 inH2O (12,43 mbar) plus extension length on extended units. All zero shifts can be calibrated out. No span effect.2051T/CA Zero shifts up to 2.5 inH2O (6,22 mbar), which can be calibrated out. No span effect.
75Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataA.3 Functional SpecificationsA.3.1 Range and Sensor LimitsZero and Span Adjustment Requirements(HART and Low Power)Zero and span values can be set anywhere within the range limits stated in Table A-1.Span must be greater than or equal to the minimum span stated in Table A-1.ServiceLiquid, gas, and vapor applications4–20 mA (Output Code A)OutputTwo-wire 4–20 mA, user-selectable for linear or square root output. Digital process variable superimposed on 4–20 mA signal, available to any host that conforms to the HART protocol.Power SupplyExternal power supply required. Standard transmitter (4–20 mA) operates on 10.5 to 55 V dc with no load.Table A-1. 2051CD, 2051CG, 2051L, and 2051H Range and Sensor LimitsRangeMinimum Span Range and Sensor Limits2051CD(1), CG, L, H(1) Range 0 only available with 2051CD. Range 1 only available with 2051CD or 2051CG.Upper (URL)Lower (LRL) 2051C Differential2051C/Gage2051L Differential2051LGage2051HDifferential 00.1 inH2O(0,25 mbar)3.0 inH2O(7,47 mbar)–3.0 inH2O(-7,47 mbar)NA NA NA NA10.5 inH2O(1,2 mbar)25 inH2O(62,3 mbar)–25 inH2O(–62,1 mbar)–25 inH2O(–62,1 mbar)NA NA NA22.5 inH2O (6,2 mbar)250 inH2O(0,62 bar)–250 inH2O(–0,62 bar)–250 inH2O(–0,62 bar) –250 inH2O(–0,62 bar)–250 inH2O(–0,62 bar)–250 inH2O(–0,62 bar)310 inH2O (24,9 mbar)1000 inH2O (2,49 bar)–1000 inH2O (–2,49 bar)0.5 psia (34,5 mbar abs)–1000 inH2O (–2,49 bar)0.5 psia(34,5 mbar abs)–1000 inH2O (–2,49 bar)43 psi (0,20 bar)300 psi (20,6 bar)–300 psi(–20,6 bar)0.5 psia (34,5 mbar abs)–300 psi(–20,6 bar)0.5 psia(34,5 mbar abs)–300 psi (–20,6 bar)520 psi (1,38 bar)2000 psi (137,9 bar)– 2000 psi(–137,9 bar)0.5 psia(34,5 mbar abs)NA NA – 2000 psi (–137,9 bar)
76Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataLoad Limitations Maximum loop resistance is determined by the voltage level of the external power supply, as described by:Wireless Self-Organizing NetworksOutputWirelessHART, 2.4 GHz DSSS.Local DisplayThe optional five-digit LCD can display user-selectable information such as primary variable in engineering units, percent of range, sensor module temperature, and electronics temperature. Display updates at up to once per minute.Update RateUser selectable, 1 sec. to 60 min.Overpressure LimitsTransmitters withstand the following limits without damage: Wireless Power ModuleField replaceable, keyed connection eliminates the risk of incorrect installation, Intrinsically Safe Lithium-thionyl chloride Power Module (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF) with polybutadine terephthalate (PBT) enclosure. Ten-year life at one minute update rate.(1)(1) Reference conditions are 70 °F (21 °C), and routing data for three additional network devices.NOTE: Continuous exposure to ambient temperature limits of -40 °F or 185 °F (-40 °C or 85 °C) may reduce specified life by less than 20 percent.Voltage (V dc)Load (Ohms)Communication requires a minimum loop resistance of 250 ohms.(1) For CSA approval, power supply must not exceed 42.4 V.Max. Loop Resistance = 43.5 (Power Supply Voltage – 10.5)OperatingRegion
77Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataRosemount 2051CD/CGRange 0: 750 psi (51,7 bar)Range 1: 2000 psig (137,9 bar)Ranges 2–5: 3626 psig (250 bar) 4500 psig (310,3 bar) for option code P9Rosemount 2051CARange 1: 750 psia (51,7 bar) Range 2: 1500 psia (103,4 bar)Range 3: 1600 psia (110,3 bar)Range 4: 6000 psia (413,7 bar)Rosemount 2051HAll Ranges: 3626 psig (25 MPa)Rosemount 2051TG/TARange 1: 750 psi (51,7 bar)Range 2: 1500 psi (103,4 bar)Range 3: 1600 psi (110,3 bar)Range 4: 6000 psi (413,7 bar)Range 5: 15000 psi (1034,2 bar)Rosemount 2051LLimit is flange rating or sensor rating, whichever is lower (see the table below).Static Pressure LimitRosemount 2051CD OnlyOperates within specifications between static line pressures of 0.5 psia and 3626 psig (4500 psig (310, 3 bar) for Option Code P9).Range 0: 0.5 psia and 750 psig (3, 4 bar and 51, 7 bar)Range 1: 0.5 psia and 2000 psig (3, 4 bar and 137, 9 bar)Standard Type CS Rating SST RatingANSI/ASME Class 150 285 psig 275 psigANSI/ASME Class 300 740 psig 720 psigANSI/ASME Class 600 1480 psig 1440 psigAt 100 °F (38 °C), the rating decreaseswith increasing temperature, per ANSI/ASME B16.5.DIN PN 10–40 40 bar 40 barDIN PN 10/16 16 bar 16 barDIN PN 25/40 40 bar 40 barAt 248 °F (120 °C), the rating decreases with increasing temperature, per DIN 2401.
78Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataBurst Pressure LimitsCoplanar or traditional process flange10000 psig (689,5 bar).2051T:Ranges 1–4: 11000 psi (758,4 bar)Range 5: 26000 psig (1792,64 bar)Temperature LimitsAmbientStorage–40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C)With LCD display: –40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C)Process Temperature LimitsAt atmospheric pressures and above.–40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C)With LCD display(1): –40 to 175 °F (–40 to 80 °C)(1) LCD display may not be readable and LCD updates will be slower at temperatures below -4 °F (-20 °C). 2051C CoplanarSilicone Fill Sensor(1)with Coplanar Flange –40 to 250 °F (–40 to 121 °C)(2)with Traditional Flange –40 to 300 °F (–40 to 149 °C)(2)(3)with Level Flange –40 to 300 °F (–40 to 149 °C)(2)with 305 Integral Manifold –40 to 300 °F (–40 to 149 °C)(2)(3)Inert Fill Sensor(1) -40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C)(4) (5)2051T In-Line (Process Fill Fluid)Silicone Fill Sensor(1) –40 to 250 °F (–40 to 121 °C)(2)Inert Fill Sensor(1) –22 to 250 °F (–30 to 121 °C)(2)2051L Low-Side Temperature LimitsSilicone Fill Sensor(1) –40 to 250 °F (–40 to 121 °C)(2)Inert Fill Sensor(1) 0 to 185 °F (–18 to 85 °C)(2)2051L High-Side Temperature Limits(Process Fill Fluid)Syltherm® XLT –102 to 302 °F (–75 to 150 °C) D. C.® Silicone 704(6) 32 to 400 °F (0 to 205 °C) D. C. Silicone 200 –49 to 400 °F (–45 to 205 °C)Inert (Halocarbon) –49 to 320 °F (–45 to 160 °C) Glycerin and Water 5 to 203 °F (–15 to 95 °C)Neobee M-20®5 to 400 °F (–15 to 205 °C)
79Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataHumidity Limits0–100% relative humidityVolumetric DisplacementLess than 0.005 in3 (0,08 cm3)DampingThe Damping command introduces a delay in processing which increases the response time of the transmitter; smoothing variations in output readings caused by rapid input changes. In the 2051 Wireless pressure transmitter, damping only takes effect when the device is placed in high power refresh mode and during calibration. In normal power mode, the effective damping is 0. Note that when the device is in high power refresh mode, battery power will be depleted rapidly.A.4 Physical SpecificationsElectrical Connections1/2–14 NPT, G1/2, and M20 x 1.5 (CM20) conduit. HART interface connections fixed to terminal block.Process Connections2051C1/4–18 NPT on 21/8-in. centers1/2–14 NPT and RC 1/2 on 2-in. (50.8 mm), 21/8-in. (54.0 mm), or 21/4-in. (57.2 mm) centers (process adapters)2051T1/2–14 NPT female, Non-Threaded instrument flange (available in SST for Range 1–4 transmitters only), G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male (available in SST for Range 1–4 transmitters only), orAutoclave type F-250-C (Pressure relieved 9/16–18 gland thread; 1/4 OD high pressure tube 60° cone; available in SST for Range 5 transmitters only).Propylene Glycol and Water 5 to 203 °F (–15 to 95 °C) (1) Process temperatures above 185 °F (85 °C) require derating the ambient limits by a 1.5:1 ratio.(2) 220 °F (104 °C) limit in vacuum service; 130 °F (54 °C) for pressures below 0.5 psia.(3) -20 °F (-29 °C) is the lower process temperature limit with option code P0.(4) 160 °F (71 °C) limit in vacuum service.(5) Not available for 2051_CA.(6) Upper limit of 600 °F (315 °C) is available with 1199 seal assemblies mounted away from the transmitter with the use of capillaries and up to 500 °F (260 °C) with direct mount extension. 2051C Coplanar
80Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference Data2051LHigh pressure side: 2-in.(50.8mm), 3-in. (72 mm), or 4-in. (102mm), ASME B 16.5 (ANSI) Class 150, 300 or 600 flange; 50, 80 or 100 mm, DIN 2501 PN 40 or 10/16 flangeLow pressure side: 1/4–18 NPT on flange, 1/2–14 NPT on process adapterProcess-Wetted PartsProcess Isolating DiaphragmsDrain/Vent Valves316 SST, Alloy C-276, or Alloy 400/K-500 material(Alloy 400/K-500 is not available with 2051L).Process Flanges and AdaptersPlated carbon steelSST: CF-8M (Cast 316 SST) per ASTM A743Cast C-276: CW-12MW per ASTM A494Cast Alloy 400: M-30C per ASTM A494Wetted O-ringsGlass-filled PTFE(Graphite-filled PTFE with Isolating Diaphragm code 6)2051L Process Wetted PartsFlanged Process Connection (Transmitter High Side)Process Diaphragms, Including Process Gasket Surface316L SST, Alloy C-276, or TantalumExtensionCF-3M (Cast 316L SST, material per ASTM A743), or CW-12MW (Cast C-276, material ASTM A494); fits schedule 40 and 80 pipeMounting FlangeZinc-cobalt plated CS or 316 SSTIsolating Diaphragm Material2051CD/CG2051T2051CA2051H316L SST • • • •Alloy C-276 • • • •
81Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataReference Process Connection (Transmitter Low Side)Isolating Diaphragms316L SST or Alloy C-276Reference Flange and AdapterCF-8M (Cast version of 316 SST, material per ASTM-A743)Non-Wetted PartsElectronics HousingLow-copper aluminum alloy or SST: CF-3M (Cast 316L SST) or CF-8M (Cast 316 SST) NEMA 4X, IP66/68Coplanar Sensor Module HousingCF-3M (Cast version of 316L SST)BoltsPlated carbon steel per ASTM A449, Type 1Austenitic 316 SST per ASTM F593ASTM A453, Class D, Grade 660 SSTASTM A193, Grade B7M alloy steelASTM A193, Class 2, Grade B8M SSTAlloy K-500Sensor Module Fill FluidSilicone or inert halocarbon (Inert is not available with 2051CA). In-Line series uses Fluorinert® FC-43.Process Fill Fluid (Liquid Level Only)2051L: Syltherm XLT, D.C. Silicone 704, D.C. Silicone 200, inert, glycerin and water, Neobee M-20, propylene glycol and water.PaintPolyurethaneCover O-ringsBuna-NPower ModuleField replaceable, keyed connection eliminates the risk of incorrect installation, Intrinsically Safe Lithium-thionyl chloride Power Module (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF) with PBT enclosure
82Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataShipping Weights for 2051 Wireless Pressure TransmitterTable A-2. Transmitter weights without options Table A-3. 2051L weights without options Transmitter option weights Complete Transmitter(1)(1) Fully functional transmitter with terminal block, covers, and SST flange.Add Weight In lb (kg)2051C with engineered polymer housing 3.90 (1,8)2051T with engineered polymer housing 2.3 (1,0)FlangeFlushlb. (kg)2-in. Ext.lb (kg)4-in. Ext.lb (kg)6-in. Ext.lb (kg)2-in., 150 6.1 (2,8) — — —3-in., 150 12.3 (5,6) 13.0 (5,9) 14.2 (6,4) 15.5 (7,0)4-in., 150 17.8 (8,1) 17.5 (7,9) 18.7 (8,4) 20.0 (9,1)2-in., 300 7.9 (3,6) — — —3-in., 300 16.2 (7,3) 16.9 (7,7) 18.1 (8,2) 19.4 (8,8)4-in., 300 27 (12,2) 26.9 (12,2) 28.1 (12,7) 29.4 (13,3)2-in., 600 9.4 (4,3) — — —3-in., 600 18.7 (8,5) 19.4 (8,8) 20.6 (9,3) 21.9 (9,9)DN 50 / PN 40 7.9 (3,6) — — —DN 80 / PN 40 12.6 (5,7) 13.3 (6,0) 14.5 (6,6) 15.8 (7,2)DN 100 / PN 10/16 7.8 (3,5) 8.5 (3,9) 9.7 (4,4) 11.0 (5,0)DN 100 / PN 40 9.2 (4,2) 9.9 (4,5) 11.1 (5,0) 12.4 (5,6)Option Code Option Add lb (kg)B4 SST Mounting Bracket for Coplanar Flange 1.2 (0,5)B1, B2, B3 Mounting Bracket for Traditional Flange 1.7 (0,8)B7, B8, B9 Mounting Bracket for Traditional Flange with SST Bolts 1.7 (0,8)BA, BC SST Bracket for Traditional Flange 1.6 (0,7)B4 SST Mounting Bracket for In-Line 1.3 (0,6)F12, F22 SST Traditional Flange with SST Drain Vents(1) (1) Includes mounting bolts.3.2 (1,5)F13, F23 Cast C-276 Traditional Flange with Alloy C-276 Drain Vents(1) 3.6 (1,6)E12, E22 SST Coplanar Flange with SST Drain Vents(1) 1.9 (0,9)F14, F24 Cast Alloy 400 Traditional Flange with Alloy 400/K-500 Drain Vents(1) 3.6 (1,6)F15, F25 SST Traditional Flange with Alloy C-276 Drain Vents(1) 3.2 (1,5)G21 Level Flange—3 in., 150 12.6 (5,7)G22 Level Flange—3 in., 300 15.9 (7,2)G11 Level Flange—2 in., 150 6.8 (3,1)G12 Level Flange—2 in., 300 8.2 (3,7)G31 DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 50, PN 40 7.8 (3,5)G41 DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 80, PN 40 13.0 (5,9)Item Weight in lb. (kg)Polymer Standard Cover 0.2 (0,09)SST Standard Cover 1.3 (0,6)Polymer Display Cover 0.2 (0,09)SST Display Cover 1.5 (0,7)Wireless Battery Cover 0.1 (0,04)LCD Display(1)(1) Display only.0.1 (0,04)Power Module 0.4 (0,18)
83Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataA.5 Dimensional DrawingsDimensions are in inches (millimeters). Process adapters (option D2) and Rosemount 305 integral manifolds must be ordered with the transmitter.2051 Wireless Housing with In-Line and Coplanar SuperModule Platform
84Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference Data(1) Tolerances are 0.040 (1,02), –0.020 (0,51).Table A-4. 2051L Dimensional SpecificationsExcept where indicated, dimensions are in inches (millimeters).ClassPipe SizeFlange Thickness ABolt Circle Diameter BOutside Diameter CNo. of BoltsBolt Hole DiameterExtension Diameter(1) DO.D. Gasket Surface EASME B16.5 (ANSI) 150 2 (51) 0.69 (18) 4.75 (121) 6.0 (152) 40.75 (19) NA 3.6 (92)3 (76) 0.88 (22) 6.0 (152) 7.5 (191) 40.75 (19) 2.58 (66) 5.0 (127)4 (102) 0.88 (22) 7.5 (191) 9.0 (229) 80.75 (19) 3.5 (89) 6.2 (158)ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 300 2 (51) 0.82 (21) 5.0 (127) 6.5 (165) 80.75 (19) NA 3.6 (92)3 (76) 1.06 (27) 6.62 (168) 8.25 (210) 80.88 (22) 2.58 (66) 5.0 (127)4 (102) 1.19 (30) 7.88 (200) 10.0 (254) 80.88 (22) 3.5 (89) 6.2 (158)ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 600 2 (51) 1.00 (25) 5.0 (127) 6.5 (165) 80.75 (19) NA 3.6 (92)3 (76) 1.25 (32) 6.62 (168) 8.25 (210) 80.88 (22) 2.58 (66) 5.0 (127)DIN 2501 PN 10–40 DN 50 20 mm 125 mm 165 mm 418 mm NA 4.0 (102)DIN 2501 PN 25/40 DN 80 24 mm 160 mm 200 mm 818 mm 65 mm 5.4 (138)DN 100 24 mm 190 mm 235 mm 822 mm 89 mm 6.2 (158)DIN 2501 PN 10/16 DN 100 20 mm 180 mm 220 mm 818 mm 89 mm 6.2 (158)ClassPipe SizeProcess Side FLower Housing GH1/4 NPT 1/2 NPTASME B16.5 (ANSI) 150 2 (51) 2.12 (54) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) 6.66 (169)3 (76) 3.6 (91) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) 6.66 (169)4 (102) 3.6 (91) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) 6.66 (169)ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 300 2 (51) 2.12 (54) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) 6.66 (169)3 (76) 3.6 (91) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) 6.66 (169)4 (102) 3.6 (91) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) 6.66 (169)ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 600 2 (51) 2.12 (54) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) 8.66 (219)3 (76) 3.6 (91) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) 8.66 (219)DIN 2501 PN 10–40 DN 50 2.4 (61) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) 6.66 (169)DIN 2501 PN 25/40 DN 80 3.6 (91) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) 6.66 (169)DN 100 3.6 (91) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) 6.66 (169)DIN 2501 PN 10/16 DN 100 3.6 (91) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) 6.66 (169)
85Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataA.6 Ordering InformationTable A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.Model Transmitter Type2051C Coplanar Pressure TransmitterMeasurement TypeStandard StandardDDifferential ★GGage ★ExpandedAAbsolutePressure Range2051CD 2051CG 2051CAStandard Standard1–25 to 25 inH2O(–62.2 to 62.2 mbar) –25 to 25 inH2O(–62,1 to 62.2 mbar) 0 to 30 psia(0 to 2.1 bar)★2–250 to 250 inH2O(–623 to 623 mbar) –250 to 250 inH2O(–621 to 623 mbar) 0 to 150 psia(0 to 10.3 bar)★3–1000 to 1000 inH2O(–2.5 to 2.5 bar) –393 to 1000 inH2O(–0.98 to 2.5 bar) 0 to 800 psia(0 to 55.2 bar)★4–300 to 300 psi(–20.7 to 20.7 bar) –14.2 to 300 psi(–0.98 to 20.7 bar) 0 to 4000 psia(0 to 275.8 bar)★5–2000 to 2000 psi(–137.9 to137.9 bar) –14.2 to 2000 psi(–0.98 to 137.9 bar) Not Applicable ★Expanded0(1) –3 to 3 inH2O(–7.5 to 7.5 mbar) Not Applicable Not ApplicableTransmitter OutputStandard StandardA4–20 mA with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol ★F FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol ★W(2) Profibus PA Protocol ★XWireless ★ExpandedMLow-Power, 1–5 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol (See Option C2 for 0.8–3.2 V dc)Materials of ConstructionProcess Flange Type Flange Material Drain/VentStandard Standard2Coplanar SST SST ★3(3) Coplanar Cast C-276 Alloy C-276 ★4Coplanar Cast Alloy 400 Alloy 400/K-500 ★5Coplanar Plated CS SST ★7(3) Coplanar SST Alloy C-276 ★8(3) Coplanar Plated CS Alloy C-276 ★0Alternate Process Connection ★
86Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataIsolating DiaphragmStandard Standard2(3) 316L SST ★3(3) Alloy C-276 ★Expanded4Alloy 4005Tantalum (Available on 2051CD and CG, Ranges 2–5 only. Not available on 2051CA) 6Gold-plated Alloy 400 (Use in combination with O-ring Option Code B.)7Gold-plated SSTO-ringStandard StandardAGlass-filled PTFE ★BGraphite-filled PTFE ★Sensor Fill FluidStandard Standard1Silicone ★2Inert (Differential and Gage only) ★Housing Material Conduit Entry SizeStandard StandardAAluminum ½–14 NPT ★BAluminum M20 × 1.5 ★JSST ½–14 NPT ★KSST M20 × 1.5 ★PEngineered Polymer N/A ★ExpandedDAluminum G½MSST G½A.6.1 Options (Include with selected model number)Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and ProtocolStandard StandardWA3 User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART ★Antenna and SmartPowerStandard StandardWP5 Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) ★Plantweb Control FunctionalityStandard StandardA01 FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite ★Plantweb Diagnostic FunctionalityStandard StandardD01 FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostics Suite ★Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
87Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataAlternate Flange(4) Standard StandardH2 Traditional Flange, 316 SST, SST Drain/Vent ★H3(3) Traditional Flange, Alloy C, Alloy C-276 Drain/Vent ★H4 Traditional Flange, Cast Alloy 400, Alloy 400/K-500 Drain/Vent ★H7(3) Traditional Flange, 316 SST, Alloy C-276 Drain/Vent ★HJ DIN Compliant Traditional Flange, SST, 1/16 in. Adapter/Manifold Bolting ★FA Level Flange, SST, 2 in., ANSI Class 150, Vertical Mount ★FB Level Flange, SST, 2 in., ANSI Class 300, Vertical Mount ★FC Level Flange, SST, 3 in., ANSI Class 150, Vertical Mount ★FD Level Flange, SST, 3 in., ANSI Class 300, Vertical Mount ★FP DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 50, PN 40, Vertical Mount ★FQ DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 80, PN 40, Vertical Mount ★ExpandedHK(5) DIN Compliant Traditional Flange, SST, 10 mm Adapter/Manifold BoltingHL DIN Compliant Traditional Flange, SST, 12mm Adapter/Manifold Bolting (Not available on 2051CD0)Manifold Assembly(5)(9)Standard StandardS5 Assemble to Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold ★S6 Assemble to Rosemount 304 Manifold or Connection System ★Integral Mount Primary Element(5)(9)Standard StandardS4(6) Assemble to Rosemount Annubar or Rosemount 1195 Integral Orifice ★S3 Assemble to Rosemount 405 Compact Orifice Plate ★Seal Assemblies(9) Standard StandardS1(7) Assemble to one Rosemount 1199 seal ★S2(8) Assemble to two Rosemount 1199 seals ★All-Welded Seal Assemblies (for high vacuum applications)(9)Standard StandardS0 One Seal, All-Welded System (Direct Mount Connection Type) ★S7 One Seal, All-Welded System (Capillary Connection Type) ★S8 Two Seals, All-Welded System (Capillary Connection Type) ★S9 Two Seals, All-Welded System (One Direct Mount and One Capillary Connection Type) ★Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
88Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataMounting Bracket Standard StandardB1 Traditional Flange Bracket for 2-in. Pipe Mounting, CS Bolts ★B2 Traditional Flange Bracket for Panel Mounting, CS Bolts ★B3 Traditional Flange Flat Bracket for 2-in. Pipe Mounting, CS Bolts ★B4 Coplanar Flange Bracket for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting, all SST ★B7 B1 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts ★B8 B2 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts ★B9 B3 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts ★BA SST B1 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts ★BC SST B3 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts ★Product CertificationsStandard StandardC6 CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 ★E2(11) INMETRO Flameproof ★E3(11) Chine FlameproofE4(10) TIIS Flame-proof ★E5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-Proof ★E7(11) IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof ★E8 ATEX Flameproof and Dust Certification ★I1(11) ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust ★I2(11) INMETRO Intrinsic Safety ★I3 China Intrinsic Safety ★I4(12) TIIS Intrinsic Safety ★I5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ★I7(11) IECEx Intrinsic Safety ★IA ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only ★IE FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only ★K2(11) INMETRO Flameproof, Instrinsic Safety ★K5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-Proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 ★K6(11) CSA and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of C6 and K8) ★K7(11) IECEx Flame-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, and Type n (combination of I7, N7, and E7) ★K8(11) ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust (combination of E8, I1 and N1) ★KB FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition Proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of K5 and C6)★KD(11) FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1, and E8) ★N1(11) ATEX Type n Certification and Dust ★N3 China Type n ★N7(11) IECEx Type n Certification ★Drinking Water ApprovalStandard StandardDW(13) NSF drinking water approval ★Shipboard Approvals Standard StandardSBS American Bureau of Shipping ★Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
89Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataCustody TransferStandard StandardC5(16) Measurement Canada Accuracy Approval (Limited availability depending on transmitter type and range. Contact an Emerson Process Management representative)★Bolting MaterialStandard StandardL4 Austenitic 316 SST Bolts ★L5 ASTM A 193, Grade B7M Bolts ★L6 Alloy K-500 Bolts ★Display and Interface OptionsStandard StandardM4(14) LCD Display with Local Operator Interface ★M5 LCD Display for Aluminum Housing (Housing Codes A, B, C, and D only) ★M6 LCD Display for SST Housing (Housing Codes J, K, L, and M only) ★Calibration CertificateStandard StandardQ4 Calibration Certificate ★QG Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate ★QP Calibration certification and tamper evident seal ★Material Traceability CertificationStandard StandardQ8 Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B ★Quality Certification for SafetyStandard StandardQS(15) Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data ★QT Safety certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA data ★Hardware AdjustmentsStandard StandardD1 Hardware adjustments (zero, span, alarm, security) ★DZ Digital Zero Trim ★Hardware AdjustmentsStandard StandardJ1(16)(17) Local Zero Adjustment Only ★J3(16)(17) No Local Zero or Span Adjustment ★Transient Protection Terminal BlockStandard StandardT1(18) Transient Protection Terminal Block ★Software ConfigurationStandard StandardC1(16) Custom Software Configuration (Completed CDS 00806-0100-4001 required with order) ★Low Power OutputExpandedC2 0.8–3.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol (Output Code M only) Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
90Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataGage Pressure CalibrationStandard StandardC3 Gage Calibration (Model 2051CA4 only) ★Alarm LimitStandard StandardC4(16)(19) Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, Alarm High ★CN(16)(19) Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, Alarm Low ★Pressure TestingExpandedP1 Hydrostatic Testing with CertificateCleaning Process AreaExpandedP2 Cleaning for Special ServiceP3 Cleaning for <1 PPM Chlorine/FluorinePressure CalibrationExpandedP4 Calibrate at Line Pressure (Specify Q48 on order for corresponding certificate)PerformanceStandard StandardP8(20) High Performance Option ★Flange AdaptersStandard StandardDF(21) 1/2 -14 NPT flange adapter(s) ★D3 ¼–18 NPT Process Connections (No flange adapters), HastelloyD3 ¼–18 NPT Process Connections (No flange adapters), MonelVent/Drain ValvesExpandedD7 Coplanar Flange Without Drain/Vent PortsConduit PlugStandard StandardDO(22) 316 SST Conduit Plug ★RC1/4 RC1/2 Process ConnectionExpandedD9(23) RC ¼ Flange with RC ½ Flange Adapter, CS - SSTD9 JIS Process Connection—RC ¼ Flange with RC ½ Flange Adapter, 316SSTMax Static Line PressureStandard StandardP9 4500 psig (310 bar) Static Pressure Limit (2051CD Ranges 2–5 only) ★Ground ScrewStandard StandardV5(24) External Ground Screw Assembly ★Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
91Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataSurface FinishStandard StandardQ16 Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals ★Toolkit Total System Performance ReportsStandard StandardQZ Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report ★Conduit Electrical ConnectorStandard StandardGE M12, 4-pin, Male Connector (eurofast®)★GM A size Mini, 4-pin, Male Connector (minifast®)★Typical Model Number: 2051CD 2 A 2 2 A 1 A B4$13857 780(1) 2051CD0 is available only with Output Code A, Process Flange Code 0 (Alternate Flange H2, H7, HJ, or HK), Isolating Diaphragm Code 2, O-ring Code A, and Bolting Option L4. (2) Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration. (3) Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.(4) Requires 0 code in Materials of Construction for Alternate Process Connection.(5) Not valid with optional code P9 for 4500 psi Static Pressure.(6) Process Flange limited to Coplanar (codes 2, 3, 5, 7, 8) or Traditional (H2, H3, H7).(7) Not valid with optional code D9 for RC1/2 Adaptors.(8) Not valid for optional codes DF and D9 for Adaptors.(9) “Assemble-to” items are specified separately and require a completed model number.(10) Available only with output codes A - 4-20 HART and F - FOUNDATION fieldbus.(11) Not available with Low Power code M.(12) Available only with 2051CD and 2051CG and output code A - 4-20 mA HART(13) Not available with Alloy C-276 isolator (3 code), tantalum isolator (5 code), all cast C-276 flanges, all plated CS flanges, all DIN flanges, all Level flanges, assemble-to manifolds (S5 and S6 codes), assemble-to seals (S1 and S2 codes), assemble-to primary elements (S3 and S4 codes), surface finish certification (Q16 code), and remote seal system report (QZ code).(14) Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.(15) Only available with HART 4-20 mA output (output code A).(16) Not available with Fieldbus (output code F) or Profibus (output code W).(17) Local zero and span adjustments are standard unless Option Code J1 or J3 is specified(18) The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA and IE.(19) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.(20) High Performance Option includes 0.04% Reference Accuracy. See Performance Specifications for details.(21) Not valid with Alternate Process Connection options S3, S4, S5, and S6.(22) Transmitter is shipped with 316 SST conduit plug (uninstalled) in place of standard carbon steel conduit plug.(23) Not available with Alternate Process Connection; DIN Flanges and Level Flanges.(24) The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
92Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataTable A-6. 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.Model Transmitter Type2051T In-Line Pressure TransmitterPressure TypeStandard StandardGGage ★AAbsolute ★Pressure Range2051TG(1) 2051TAStandard Standard1-14.7 to 30 psi (-1.0 to 2.1 bar) 0 to 30 psia (0 to 2.1 bar) ★2-14.7 to 150 psi (-1.0 to 10.3 bar) 0 to 150 psia (0 to 10.3 bar) ★3-14.7 to 800 psi (-1.0 to 55 bar) 0 to 800 psia (0 to 55 bar) ★4-14.7 to 4000 psi (-1.0 to 276 bar) 0 to 4000 psia (0 to 276 bar) ★5-14.7 to 10000 psi (-1.0 to 689 bar) 0 to 10000 psia (0 to 689 bar) ★Transmitter OutputStandard StandardA4–20 mA with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol ★F FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol ★W(2) Profibus PA Protocol ★XWireless ★ExpandedMLow-Power 1–5 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol Process Connection StyleStandard Standard2B 1/2–14 NPT Female ★2C G½ A DIN 16288 Male (Available in SST for Range 1–4 only) ★Expanded2F Coned and Threaded, Compatible with Autoclave Type F-250-C (Range 5 only)61 Non-threaded Instrument flange (Range 1-4 only)Isolating Diaphragm Process Connection Wetted Parts MaterialStandard Standard2(3) 316L SST 316L SST ★3(3) Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 ★Sensor Fill FluidStandard Standard1Silicone ★2Inert ★Housing Material Conduit Entry SizeStandard StandardAAluminum ½–14 NPT ★BAluminum M20 × 1.5 ★JSST ½–14 NPT ★KSST M20 × 1.5 ★PEngineered Polymer with Aluminum Module Material N/A ★SEngineered Polymer with SST Module Material N/A ★ExpandedDAluminum G½MSST G½
93Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataA.6.2 Options (Include with selected model number)Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and ProtocolStandard StandardWA3 User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART ★Antenna and SmartPowerStandard StandardWP5 Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) ★PlantWeb Control Functionality Standard StandardA01 Advanced Control Function Block Suite ★PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality Standard StandardD01 FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostics Suite ★Manifold AssembliesStandard StandardS5(4) Assemble to Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold ★Seal Assemblies Standard StandardS1(4) Assemble to one Rosemount 1199 seal ★Mounting BracketStandard StandardB4 Bracket for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting, All SST ★Product CertificationsStandard StandardC6 CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 ★E2 INMETRO Flameproof ★E3 China Flameproof ★E4(5) TIIS Flameproof ★E5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof ★E7(5) IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof ★E8 ATEX Flameproof and Dust Certification ★I1(5) ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust ★I2 INMETRO Intrinsic Safety ★I3 China Intrinsic Safety ★I5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ★I7(5) IECEx Intrinsic Safety ★IA ATEX Intrinsic Safety for FISCO; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only ★IE FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only ★K2 INMETRO Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety ★K5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 ★K6(5) CSA and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of C6 and K8) ★K7(5) IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, and Type n (combination of I7, N7, and E7) ★K8(5) ATEX Flame-proof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust (combination of E8, I1 and N1) ★KB FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of K5 and C6)★KD(5) FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1, and E8) ★N1(5) ATEX Type n Certification and Dust ★N3 China Type n ★N7(5) IECEx Type n Certification ★Table A-6. 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
94Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataDrinking Water ApprovalStandard StandardDW(6) NSF drinking water approval ★Shipboard ApprovalsStandard StandardSBS American Bureau of Shipping ★Custody TransferStandard StandardC5 Measurement Canada Accuracy Approval (Limited availability depending on transmitter type and range. Contact an Emerson Process Management representative)★Calibration CertificationStandard StandardQ4 Calibration Certificate ★QG Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate ★QP Calibration Certification and tamper evident seal ★Material Traceability CertificationStandard StandardQ8 Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B ★Quality Certification for SafetyStandard StandardQS(7) Prior-use certificate of FMEDA Data ★Zero/Span AdjustmentStandard StandardJ1(8)(9) Local Zero Adjustment Only ★J3(8)(9) No Local Zero or Span Adjustment ★DZ Digital Zero Trim ★ExpandedD1 Hardware adjustments (zero, span, alarm, security)Display and Interface OptionsStandard StandardM4(10) LCD Display with Local Operator Interface ★M5 LCD Display ★M6 LCD Display for SST Housing (Housing Codes J, K, L and M only) ★Conduit PlugStandard StandardDO(11) 316 SST Conduit Plug ★Transient Terminal BlockStandard StandardT1(12) Transient Protection Terminal Block ★Software ConfigurationStandard StandardC1(8) Custom Software Configuration (Completed CDS 00806-0100-4001 required with order) ★ExpandedC2(8) 0.8–3.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol (Output Code M only)Alarm LimitStandard StandardC4(8)(13) Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, Alarm High ★CN(8)(13) Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, Low Alarm ★Table A-6. 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
95Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataPressure TestingExpandedP1 Hydrostatic Testing with CertificateCleaning Process Area(14)ExpandedP2 Cleaning for Special ServiceP3 Cleaning for <1 PPM Chlorine/FluorinePerformanceStandard StandardP8(15) High Performance Option ★Ground ScrewStandard StandardV5(16) External Ground Screw Assembly ★Surface FinishStandard StandardQ16 Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals ★Toolkit Total System Performance ReportsStandard StandardQZ Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report ★Conduit Electrical ConnectorStandard StandardGE M12, 4-pin, Male Connector (eurofast®)★GM A size Mini, 4-pin, Male Connector (minifast®)★Typical Model Number: 2051T G 5 F 2A 2 1 A B4(1) 2051TG lower range limit varies with atmospheric pressure. (2) Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration. (3) Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.(4) “Assemble-to” items are specified separately and require a completed model number.(5) Not available with low-power Option Code M.(6) Not available with Alloy C-276 isolator (3 code), tantalum isolator (5 code), all cast C-276 flanges, all plated CS flanges, all DIN flanges, all Level flanges, assemble-to manifolds (S5 and S6 codes), assemble-to seals (S1 and S2 codes), assemble-to primary elements (S3 and S4 codes), surface finish certification (Q16 code), and remote seal system report (QZ code).(7) Only available with HART 4-20 mA output (output code A).(8) Not available with fieldbus (output code F) or Profibus protocols (output code W).(9) Local zero and span adjustments are standard unless Option Code J1 or J3 is specified.(10) Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.(11) Transmitter is shipped with 316 SST conduit plug (uninstalled) in place of standard carbon steel conduit plug.(12) The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA and IE.(13) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.(14) Not valid with Alternate Process Connection S5.(15) High Performance Option includes 0.04% Reference Accuracy. See Performance Specifications for details.(16) The V5 option is not needed with T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.Table A-6. 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
96Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference Data Table A-7. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.Model Transmitter Type2051L Liquid Level TransmitterPressure RangeStandard Standard2–250 to 250 inH2O (–0,6 to 0,6 bar) ★3–1000 to 1000 inH2O (–2,5 to 2,5 bar) ★4–300 to 300 psi (–20,7 to 20,7 bar) ★Transmitter OutputStandard StandardA4–20 mA with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol ★F FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol ★W(1) Profibus PA Protocol ★XWireless ★ExpandedMLow-Power 1–5 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol (See Option Code C2 for 0.8–3.2 V dc Output) Process Connection Size, Material, Extension length (High Side)Standard StandardCode Process Connection Size Material Extension Length ★G0(2) 2-in./DN 50 316L SST Flush Mount Only ★H0(2) 2-in./DN 50 Alloy C-276 Flush Mount Only ★J0 2-in./DN 50 Tantalum Flush Mount Only ★A0(2) 3-in./DN 80 316L SST Flush Mount ★A2(2) 3-in./DN 80 316L SST 2-in./50 mm ★A4(2) 3-in./DN 80 316L SST 4-in./100 mm ★A6(2) 3-in./DN 80 316L SST 6-in./150 mm ★B0(2) 4-in./DN 100 316L SST Flush Mount ★B2(2) 4-in./DN 100 316L SST 2-in./50 mm ★B4(2) 4-in./DN 100 316L SST 4-in./100 mm ★B6(2) 4-in./DN 100 316L SST 6-in./150 mm ★C0(2) 3-in./DN 80 Alloy C-276 Flush Mount ★C2(2) 3-in./DN 80 Alloy C-276 2-in./50 mm ★C4(2) 3-in./DN 80 Alloy C-276 4-in./100 mm ★C6(2) 3-in./DN 80 Alloy C-276 6-in./150 mm ★D0(2) 4-in./DN 100 Alloy C-276 Flush Mount ★D2(2) 4-in./DN 100 Alloy C-276 2-in./50 mm ★D4(2) 4-in./DN 100 Alloy C-276 4-in./100 mm ★D6(2) 4-in./DN 100 Alloy C-276 6-in./150 mm ★E0 3-in./DN 80 Tantalum Flush Mount Only ★F0 4-in./DN 100 Tantalum Flush Mount Only ★Mounting Flange Size, Rating, Material (High Side)Size Rating MaterialStandard StandardM2-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 CS ★A3-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 CS ★B4-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 CS ★
97Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataN2-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 CS ★C3-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 CS ★D4-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 CS ★P2-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 CS ★E3-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 CS ★X(2) 2-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 SST ★F(2) 3-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 SST ★G(2) 4-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 SST ★Y(2) 2-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 SST ★H(2) 3-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 SST ★J(2) 4-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 SST ★Z(2) 2-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 SST ★L(2) 3-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 SST ★QDN 50 PN 10-40 per EN 1092-1 CS ★RDN 80 PN 40 per EN 1092-1 CS ★SDN 100 PN 40 per EN 1092-1 CS ★VDN 100 PN 10/16 per EN 1092-1 CS ★K(2) DN 50 PN 10-40 per EN 1092-1 SST ★T(2) DN 80 PN 40 per EN 1092-1 SST ★U(2) DN 100 PN 40 per EN 1092-1 SST ★W(2) DN 100 PN 10/16 per EN 1092-1 SST ★7(2) 4 in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 SST ★Expanded1 — 10K per JIS B2238 CS2 — 20K per JIS B2238 CS3 — 40K per JIS B2238 CS4(2) —10K per JIS B2238 316 SST5(2) —20K per JIS B2238 316 SST6(2) —40K per JIS B2238 316 SSTSeal Fill Fluid (High Side) Specific GravityTemperature Limits (Ambient Temperature of 70° F (21° C))Standard StandardASyltherm XLT 0.85 -102 to 293 °F (-75 to 145 °C) ★CSilicone 704 1.07 32 to 401 °F (0 to 205 °C) ★DSilicone 200 0.93 -49 to 401 °F (-45 to 205 °C) ★HInert (Halocarbon) 1.85 -49 to 320 °F (-45 to 160 °C) ★GGlycerine and Water 1.13 5 to 203 °F (-15 to 95 °C) ★NNeobee M-20 0.92 5 to 401 °F (-15 to 205 °C) ★PPropylene Glycol and Water 1.02 5 to 203 F (-15 to 95 °C) ★Low Pressure Side ConfigurationFlange Adapter Diaphragm Material Sensor Fill FluidStandard Standard11(2) Gage SST 316L SST Silicone ★21(2) Differential SST 316L SST Silicone ★22(2) Differential SST Alloy C-276 Silicone ★Table A-7. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
98Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference Data2A(2) Differential SST 316L SST Inert (Halocarbon) ★2B(2) Differential SST Alloy C-276 Inert (Halocarbon) ★31(2) Tun ed -Sy stem Assembly with Remote SealNone 316L SST Silicone (Requires Option Code S1) ★O-ringStandard StandardAGlass-filled PTFE ★Housing Material Conduit Entry SizeStandard StandardAAluminum ½–14 NPT ★BAluminum M20 × 1.5 ★JSST ½–14 NPT ★KSST M20 × 1.5 ★PEngineered Polymer N/A ★ExpandedDAluminum G½MSST G½A.6.3 Options (Include with selected model number)Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and ProtocolStandard StandardWA3 User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART ★Antenna and SmartPowerStandard StandardWP5 Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) ★PlantWeb Control FunctionalityStandard StandardA01(3) FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite ★PlantWeb Diagnostic FunctionalityStandard StandardD01(3) FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostics Suite ★Seal AssembliesStandard StandardS1(4) Assembled to One Rosemount 1199 Seal (Requires 1199M) ★Product CertificationsStandard StandardE5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof ★I5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ★K5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 ★I1(5) ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust ★N1(5) ATEX Type n Certification and Dust ★E8 ATEX Flameproof and Dust Certification ★E4(5) TIIS Flameproof ★C6 CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 ★Table A-7. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
99Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataK6(5) CSA and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of C6 and K8) ★KB FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of K5 and C6)★K7(5) IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, and Type n (combination of I7, N7 and E7) ★K8(5) ATEX Flame-proof and Intrinsic Safety Approvals (combination of I1 and E8) ★KD(5) FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1, and E8) ★I7(5) IECEx Intrinsic Safety ★E7(5) IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof ★N7(5) IECEx Type n Certification ★IA ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety ★IE FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe ★E2 INMETRO Flameproof ★I2 INMETRO Intrinsic Safety ★K2 INMETRO Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety ★E3 China Flameproof ★I3 China Intrinsic Safety ★N3 China Type n ★Shipboard ApprovalsStandard StandardSBS American Bureau of Shipping ★Bolting MaterialStandard StandardL4 Austenitic 316 SST Bolts ★L5 ASTM A 193, Grade B7M bolts ★L6 Alloy K-500 Bolts ★L8 ASTM A 193 Class 2, Grade B8M Bolts ★Display and Interface OptionsStandard StandardM4(6) LCD Display with Local Operator Interface ★M5 LCD Display for Aluminum Housing (Housing Codes A, B, C, and D only) ★M6 LCD Display for SST Housing (Housing Codes J, K, L, and M only) ★Calibration CertificationStandard StandardQ4 Calibration Certificate ★QP Calibration Certificate and tamper evident seal ★QG Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate ★Material Traceability CertificationStandard StandardQ8 Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1 ★Quality Certification for SafetyStandard StandardQS(7) Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data ★Toolkit Total System Performance ReportsStandard StandardQZ Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report ★Table A-7. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
100Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataConduit Electrical ConnectorStandard StandardGE M12, 4-pin, Male Connector (eurofast®)★GM A size Mini, 4-pin, Male Connector (minifast®)★Hardware AdjustmentsStandard StandardJ1(8)(9) Local Zero Adjustment Only ★J3(8)(9) No Local Zero or Span Adjustment ★DZ Digital Zero Trim ★Transient ProtectionStandard StandardT1(10) Transient Protection Terminal Block ★Software ConfigurationStandard StandardC1(8) Custom Software Configuration (Completed CDS 00806-0100-4001 required with order) ★Low Power OutputStandard StandardC2(8) 0.8–3.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol (Available with Output code M only) ★Alarm LimitStandard StandardC4(8)(11) NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm ★CN(8)(11) NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, low alarm ★Conduit PlugStandard StandardDO 316 SST Conduit Plug ★Ground ScrewStandard StandardV5(12) External Ground Screw Assembly ★Lower Housing Flushing Connection OptionsRing Material Number Size (NPT)Standard StandardF1 316 SST 11/4-18 NPT ★F2 316 SST 21/4-18 NPT ★F3 Alloy C-276 11/4-18 NPT ★F4 Alloy C-276 21/4-18 NPT ★F7 316 SST 11/2-14 NPT ★F8 316 SST 21/2-14 NPT ★F9 Alloy C-276 11/2-14 NPT ★F0 Alloy C-276 21/2-14 NPT ★Typical Model Number: 2051L 2 A A0 D 21 A A F1(1) Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration. (2) Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements highlighted within NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.(3) Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus Output Code F.Table A-7. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
101Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference Data(4) “Assemble-to” items are specified separately and require a completed model number.(5) Not available with low-power Option Code M(6) Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.(7) Only available with HART 4-20 mA output (output code A).(8) Not available with fieldbus (output code F) or profibus protocols (output code W).(9) Local zero and span adjustments are standard unless Option Code J1 or J3 is specified.(10) The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA, IE, IF, and IG. (11) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.(12) The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.
102Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataTable A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.Model Product Description2051CFA Annubar FlowmeterMeasurement TypeStandard StandardDDifferential Pressure ★Fluid TypeStandard StandardLLiquid ★GGas ★SSteam ★Line SizeStandard Standard020 2-in. (50 mm) ★025 21/2-in. (63.5 mm) ★030 3-in. (80 mm) ★035 31/2-in. (89 mm) ★040 4-in. (100 mm) ★050 5-in. (125 mm) ★060 6-in. (150 mm) ★070 7-in. (175 mm) ★080 8-in. (200 mm) ★100 10-in. (250 mm) ★120 12-in. (300 mm) ★Expanded140 14-in. (350 mm)160 16-in. (400 mm)180 18-in. (450 mm)200 20-in. (500 mm)240 24-in. (600 mm)300 30-in. (750 mm)360 36-in. (900 mm)420 42-in. (1066 mm)480 48-in. (1210 mm)600 60-in. (1520 mm)720 72-in. (1820 mm)780 78-in (1950 mm)840 84-in. (2100 mm)900 90-in. (2250 mm)960 96-in (2400 mm)Pipe I.D. Range Standard StandardCRange C from the Pipe I.D. table ★DRange D from the Pipe I.D. table ★ExpandedARange A from the Pipe I.D. tableBRange B from the Pipe I.D. tableERange E from the Pipe I.D. tableZNon-standard Pipe I.D. Range or Line Sizes greater than 12 inches
103Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataPipe Material / Mounting Assembly MaterialStandard StandardCCarbon steel (A105) ★S316 Stainless Steel ★0No Mounting (Customer Supplied) ★ExpandedG Chrome-Moly Grade F-11N Chrome-Moly Grade F-22J Chrome-Moly Grade F-91Piping OrientationStandard StandardHHorizontal Piping ★DVertical Piping with Downwards Flow ★U Vertical Piping with Upwards Flow ★Annubar TypeStandard StandardPPak-Lok ★FFlanged with opposite side support ★ExpandedLFlange-LokGGear-Drive Flo-TapMManual Flo-TapSensor MaterialStandard StandardS316 Stainless Steel ★ExpandedHAlloy C-276Sensor SizeStandard Standard1Sensor size 1 — Line sizes 2-in. (50 mm) to 8-in. (200 mm) ★2Sensor size 2 — Line sizes 6-in. (150 mm) to 96-in. (2400 mm) ★3Sensor size 3 — Line sizes greater than 12-in. (300 mm) ★Mounting TypeStandard StandardT1 Compression or Threaded Connection ★A1 150# RF ANSI ★A3 300# RF ANSI ★A6 600# RF ANSI ★D1 DN PN16 Flange ★D3 DN PN40 Flange ★D6 DN PN100 Flange ★Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
104Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataExpandedA9(1) 900# RF ANSIAF(1) 1500# RF ANSIAT(1) 2500 # RF ANSIR1 150# RTJ FlangeR3 300# RTJ FlangeR6 600# RTJ FlangeR9(1) 900# RTJ FlangeRF(1) 1500# RTJ FlangeRT(1) 2500# RTJ FlangeOpposite Side Support or Packing GlandStandard Standard0No opposite side support or packing gland (Required for Pak-Lok and Flange-Lok models) ★Opposite Side Support – Required for Flanged ModelsCNPT Threaded Opposite Support Assembly – Extended Tip ★DWelded Opposite Support Assembly – Extended Tip ★ExpandedPacking Gland – Required for Flo-Tap ModelsPacking Gland Material Rod Material Packing MaterialJStainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Carbon Steel PTFEKStainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Stainless Steel PTFELStainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Carbon Steel GraphiteNStainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Stainless Steel GraphiteRAlloy C-276 Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Stainless Steel GraphiteIsolation Valve for Flo-Tap ModelsStandard Standard0Not Applicable or Customer Supplied ★Expanded1Gate Valve, Carbon Steel2Gate Valve, Stainless Steel5Ball Valve, Carbon Steel6Ball Valve, Stainless SteelTemperature MeasurementStandard StandardTIntegral RTD – not available with Flanged model greater than class 600# ★0No Temperature Sensor ★ExpandedRRemote Thermowell and RTDTransmitter Connection PlatformStandard Standard3Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve Manifold– not available with Flanged model greater than class 600 ★5Direct -mount, 5-valve Manifold – not available with Flanged model greater than class 600 ★7Remote-mount NPT Connections (1/2-in. NPT) ★Expanded6Direct-mount, high temperature 5-valve Manifold – not available with Flanged model greater than class 6008Remote-mount SW Connections (1/2-in.)Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
105Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataDifferential Pressure RangeStandard Standard10 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar) ★20 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar) ★30 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar) ★Transmitter OutputStandard StandardA4–20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol ★F FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol ★W(2) Profibus PA Protocol ★XWireless ★ExpandedMLow-Power, 1-5 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART ProtocolTransmitter Housing Material Conduit Entry SizeStandard StandardAAluminum 1/2-14 NPT ★BAluminum M20 x 1.5 ★JSST 1/2-14 NPT ★KSST M20 x 1.5 ★PEngineered Polymer N/A ★ExpandedDAluminum G1/2MSST G1/2Transmitter Performance ClassStandard Standard11.6% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-yr. stability ★A.6.4 Options (Include with selected model number)Pressure TestingExpandedP1(3) Hydrostatic Testing with CertificatePX(3) Extended Hydrostatic TestingSpecial CleaningExpandedP2 Cleaning for Special ServicesPA Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4)Material TestingExpandedV1 Dye Penetrant ExamMaterial ExaminationExpandedV2 Radiographic ExaminationFlow CalibrationExpandedW1 Flow Calibration (Average K)Special InspectionStandard StandardQC1 Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate ★QC7 Inspection & Performance Certificate ★Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
106Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataSurface FinishStandard StandardRL Surface finish for Low Pipe Reynolds # in Gas & Steam ★RH Surface finish for High Pipe Reynolds # in Liquid ★Material Traceability CertificationStandard StandardQ8(4) Material Traceability Certification per EN 10474:2004 3.1 ★Code Conformance(5)ExpandedJ2 ANSI/ASME B31.1J3 ANSI/ASME B31.3Materials ConformanceExpandedJ5(6) NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156Country CertificationStandard StandardJ6 European Pressure Directive (PED) ★ExpandedJ1 Canadian RegistrationInstalled in Flanged Pipe Spool SectionExpandedH3 150# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and ScheduleH4 300# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and ScheduleH5 600# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and ScheduleInstrument Connections for Remote Mount OptionsStandard StandardG2 Needle Valves, Stainless Steel ★G6 OS&Y Gate Valve, Stainless Steel ★ExpandedG1 Needle Valves, Carbon SteelG3 Needle Valves, Alloy C-276G5 OS&Y Gate Valve, Carbon SteelG7 OS&Y Gate Valve, Alloy C-276Special ShipmentStandard StandardY1 Mounting Hardware Shipped Separately ★Special DimensionsExpandedVM Variable MountingVT Variable TipVS Variable length Spool SectionPlantWeb Control FunctionalityStandard StandardA01(7) FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite ★PlantWeb Diagnostic FunctionalityStandard StandardD01(7) FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostics Suite ★Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and ProtocolStandard StandardWA3 User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART ★Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
107Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataAntenna and SmartPowerStandard StandardWP5 Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) ★Product CertificationsStandard StandardC6 CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ★E5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof ★E7(8) IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof ★E8 ATEX Flameproof, Dust ★I1(8) ATEX Intrinsic Safety ★I5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ★IA ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only ★K5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5) ★K6(8) CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6) ★K8(8) ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust (combination of E8, I1 and N1) ★KB FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of K5 and C6)★KD(8) FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1, and E8) ★N1(8) ATEX Type n ★Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring OptionsStandard StandardL1 Inert Sensor Fill Fluid Note: Silicone fill fluid is standard. ★L2 Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring ★LA Inert Sensor Fill Fluid and Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring ★Shipboard ApprovalsStandard StandardSBS American Bureau of Shipping ★Display and Interface OptionsStandard StandardM4(9) LCD Display with Local Operator Interface ★M5 LCD Display ★Transmitter Calibration CertificationStandard StandardQ4 Calibration Certificate for Transmitter ★Quality Certification for SafetyStandard StandardQS(11) Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data ★Transient ProtectionStandard StandardT1(10) Transient terminal block ★Manifold for Remote Mount OptionStandard StandardF2 3-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel ★F6 5-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel ★ExpandedF1 3-Valve Manifold, Carbon SteelF3 3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276 F5 5-Valve Manifold, Carbon SteelF7 5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
108Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataLower Power OutputStandard StandardC2(11) 0.8-3.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on Hart Protocol ★Alarm LimitStandard StandardC4(11)(12) NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, High Alarm ★CN(11)(12) NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, Low Alarm ★Hardware AdjustmentsStandard StandardDZ Digital Zero Sensor Trim Configuration Button ★Ground ScrewStandard StandardV5(13) External Ground Screw Assembly ★Typical Model Number: 2051CFA D L 060 D C H P S 2 T1 0 0 0 3 2 A A 1(1) Available in remote mount applications only.(2) Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration. (3) Applies to assembled flowmeter only, mounting not tested.(4) Instrument Connections for Remote Mount Options and Isolation Valves for Flo-tap Models are not included in the Material Traceability Certification.(5) Not available with Transmitter Connection Platform 6.(6) Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.(7) Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus Output Code F.(8) Not available with Low Power code M.(9) Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.(10) The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO Product Certification code IA.(11) Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Profibus (Output Code W).(12) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.(13) The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
109Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataTable A-9. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.Model Product Description2051CFC Compact FlowmeterMeasurement TypeStandard StandardDDifferential Pressure ★Primary Element TechnologyStandard StandardCConditioning Orifice Plate ★POrifice Plate ★Material TypeStandard StandardS316 SST ★Line SizeStandard Standard005(1) 1/2-in. (15 mm) ★010(1) 1-in. (25 mm) ★015(1) 11/2-in. (40 mm) ★020 2-in. (50 mm) ★030 3-in. (80 mm) ★040 4-in. (100 mm) ★060 6-in. (150 mm) ★080 8-in. (200 mm) ★100 10-in. (250 mm) ★120 12-in. (300 mm) ★Primary Element StyleStandard StandardNSquare Edged ★Primary Element TypeStandard Standard040 0.40 Beta Ratio ★065(2) 0.65 Beta Ratio ★Temperature MeasurementStandard Standard0No Temperature Sensor ★ExpandedRRemote Thermowell and RTDTransmitter Connection PlatformStandard Standard3Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve Manifold ★7Remote-mount, 1/4-in. NPT Connections ★Differential Pressure RangeStandard Standard10 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar) ★20 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar) ★30 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar) ★
110Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataTransmitter OutputStandard StandardA4–20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol ★F FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol ★W(3) Profibus PA Protocol ★XWireless ★ExpandedMLow-Power, 1-5 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART ProtocolTransmitter Housing Material Conduit Entry SizeStandard StandardAAluminum 1/2-14 NPT ★BAluminum M20 x 1.5 ★JSST 1/2-14 NPT ★KSST M20 x 1.5 ★PEngineered Polymer N/A ★ExpandedDAluminum G1/2MSST G1/2Transmitter Performance ClassStandard Standard1Up to ±1.75% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-year stability ★A.6.5 Options (Include with selected model number)Installation AccessoriesStandard StandardAB ANSI Alignment Ring (150#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes) ★AC ANSI Alignment Ring (300#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes) ★AD ANSI Alignment Ring (600#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes) ★DG DIN Alignment Ring (PN16) ★DH DIN Alignment Ring (PN40) ★DJ DIN Alignment Ring (PN100) ★ExpandedJB JIS Alignment Ring (10K)JR JIS Alignment Ring (20K)JS JIS Alignment Ring (40K)Remote AdaptersStandard StandardFE Flange Adapters 316 SST (1/2-in NPT) ★High Temperature ApplicationExpandedHT Graphite Valve Packing (Tmax = 850 °F)Flow CalibrationExpandedWC(4) Flow Calibration Certification (3 point)WD(4) Discharge Coefficient Verification (full 10 point)Pressure TestingExpandedP1 Hydrostatic Testing with CertificateTable A-9. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
111Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataSpecial CleaningExpandedP2 Cleaning for Special ServicesPA Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4)Special InspectionStandard StandardQC1 Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate ★QC7 Inspection and Performance Certificate ★Transmitter Calibration CertificationStandard StandardQ4 Calibration Certificate for Transmitter ★Quality Certification for SafetyStandard StandardQS(5) Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data ★Material Traceability CertificationStandard StandardQ8 Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1 ★Code ConformanceExpandedJ2 ANSI/ASME B31.1J3 ANSI/ASME B31.3J4 ANSI/ASME B31.8Materials ConformanceExpandedJ5(6) NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156Country CertificationExpandedJ1 Canadian RegistrationProduct CertificationsStandard StandardC6 CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ★E5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof ★E7(7) IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof ★E8 ATEX Flameproof, Dust ★I1(7) ATEX Intrinsic Safety ★I5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ★IA ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only ★K5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5) ★K6(7) CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6) ★K8(7) ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust (combination of E8, I1 and N1) ★KB FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of K5 and C6)★KD(7) FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1, and E8) ★N1(7) ATEX Type n ★Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring OptionsStandard StandardL1 Inert Sensor Fill Fluid ★L2 Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring ★LA Inert Sensor Fill Fluid and Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring ★Table A-9. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
112Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataShipboard ApprovalsStandard StandardSBS American Bureau of Shipping ★Display and Interface OptionsStandard StandardM4(8) LCD Display with Local Operator Interface ★M5 LCD Display ★Transient ProtectionStandard StandardT1(9) Transient terminal block ★Manifold for Remote Mount OptionStandard StandardF2 3-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel ★F6 5-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel ★PlantWeb Control FunctionalityStandard StandardA01(10) FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite ★PlantWeb Diagnostic FunctionalityStandard StandardD01(10) FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostic Suite ★Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and ProtocolStandard StandardWA3 User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART ★Antenna and SmartPowerStandard StandardWP5 Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) ★Low Power OutputStandard StandardC2(11) 0.8-3.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on Hart Protocol ★Alarm LimitStandard StandardC4(11)(12) NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, High Alarm ★CN(11)(12) NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, Low Alarm ★Hardware AdjustmentsStandard StandardDZ Digital Zero Sensor Trim Configuration Button ★Ground ScrewStandard StandardV5(13) External Ground Screw Assembly ★Typical Model Number: 2051CFC D C S 060 N 065 0 3 2 A A 1 WC E5 M5(1) Not available for Primary Element Technology C.(2) For 2-in. (50 mm) line sizes the Primary Element Type is 0.6 for Primary Element Technology Code C.(3) Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration. (4) Not available with Primary Element Technology P.(5) Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Profibus (Output Code W).(6) Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.(7) Not available with Low Power code M.(8) Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.(9) The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO Product Certification code IA.(10) Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus Output Code F.(11) Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Profibus (Output Code W).(12) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.(13) The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.Table A-9. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
113Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataTable A-10. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.Model Product Description2051CFP Integral Orifice FlowmeterMeasurement TypeStandard StandardDDifferential Pressure ★Body MaterialStandard StandardS316 SST ★Line SizeStandard Standard005 1/2-in. (15 mm) ★010 1-in. (25 mm) ★015 11/2-in. (40 mm) ★Process ConnectionStandard StandardT1 NPT Female Body (Not Available with Remote Thermowell and RTD) ★S1(1) Socket Weld Body (Not Available with Remote Thermowell and RTD) ★P1 Pipe Ends: NPT Threaded ★P2 Pipe ends: Beveled ★D1 Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN16, slip-on ★D2 Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN40, slip-on ★D3 Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN100, slip-on ★W1 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, weld-neck ★W3 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, weld-neck ★W6 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, weld-neck ★ExpandedA1 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, slip-onA3 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, slip-onA6 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, slip-onR1 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 150, slip-onR3 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 300, slip-onR6 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 600, slip-onOrifice Plate MaterialStandard StandardS316 SST ★ExpandedHAlloy C-276MAlloy 400Bore Size OptionStandard Standard0066 0.066-in. (1.68 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe ★0109 0.109-in. (2.77 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe ★0160 0.160-in. (4.06 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe ★0196 0.196-in. (4.98 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe ★0260 0.260-in. (6.60 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe ★0340 0.340-in. (8.64 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe ★0150 0.150-in. (3.81 mm) for 1-in. Pipe ★
114Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference Data0250 0.250-in. (6.35 mm) for 1-in. Pipe ★0345 0.345-in. (8.76 mm) for 1-in. Pipe ★0500 0.500-in. (12.70 mm) for 1-in. Pipe ★0630 0.630-in. (16.00 mm) for 1-in. Pipe ★0800 0.800-in. (20.32 mm) for 1-in. Pipe ★0295 0.295-in. (7.49 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe ★0376 0.376-in. (9.55 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe ★0512 0.512-in. (13.00 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe ★0748 0.748-in. (19.00 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe ★1022 1.022-in. (25.96 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe ★1184 1.184-in. (30.07 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe ★Expanded0010 0.010-in. (0.25 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe0014 0.014-in. (0.36 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe0020 0.020-in. (0.51 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe0034 0.034-in. (0.86 mm) for 1/2-in. PipeTransmitter Connection PlatformStandard StandardD3 Direct-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, SST ★D5 Direct-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, SST ★R3 Remote-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, SST ★R5 Remote-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, SST ★ExpandedD4 Direct-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276D6 Direct-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276D7 Direct-mount, High Temperature, 5-Valve Manifold, SSTR4 Remote-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276R6 Remote-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276Differential Pressure RangesStandard Standard10 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar) ★20 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar) ★30 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar) ★Transmitter OutputStandard StandardA4–20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol ★F FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol ★W(2) Profibus PA Protocol ★XWireless ★ExpandedMLow-Power, 1-5 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART ProtocolTransmitter Housing Material Conduit Entry SizeStandard StandardAAluminum 1/2-14 NPT ★BAluminum M20 x 1.5 ★JSST 1/2-14 NPT ★KSST M20 x 1.5 ★PEngineered Polymer N/A ★ExpandedTable A-10. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
115Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataDAluminum G1/2MSST G1/2Transmitter Performance ClassStandard Standard1up to ±1.75% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-year stability ★A.6.6 Options (Include with selected model number)Transmitter Body / Bolt MaterialExpandedGT High Temperature (850 °F / 454 °C)Temperature SensorExpandedRT(3) Thermowell and RTDOptional ConnectionStandard StandardG1 DIN 19213 Transmitter Connection ★Pressure TestingExpandedP1(4) Hydrostatic Testing with CertificateSpecial CleaningExpandedP2 Cleaning for Special ServicesPA Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4)Material TestingExpandedV1 Dye Penetrant ExamMaterial ExaminationExpandedV2 Radiographic ExaminationFlow CalibrationExpandedWD(5) Discharge Coefficient VerificationSpecial InspectionStandard StandardQC1 Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate ★QC7 Inspection and Performance Certificate ★Material Traceability CertificationStandard StandardQ8 Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1 ★Code ConformanceExpandedJ2(6) ANSI/ASME B31.1J3(6) ANSI/ASME B31.3J4(6) ANSI/ASME B31.8Materials ConformanceExpandedJ5(7) NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156Country CertificationStandard StandardJ6 European Pressure Directive (PED) ★Table A-10. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
116Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataExpandedJ1 Canadian RegistrationTransmitter Calibration CertificationStandard StandardQ4 Calibration Certificate for Transmitter ★Quality Certification for SafetyStandard StandardQS(8) Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data ★Product CertificationsStandard StandardC6 CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ★E5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof ★E7(9) IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof ★E8 ATEX Flameproof, Dust ★I1(9) ATEX Intrinsic Safety ★I5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ★IA ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only ★K5 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5) ★K6(9) CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6) ★K8(9) ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust (combination of E8, I1 and N1) ★KB FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of K5 and C6)★KD(9) FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1 and E8) ★N1(9) ATEX Type n ★Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring OptionsStandard StandardL1 Inert Sensor Fill Fluid ★L2 Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring ★LA Inert Sensor Fill Fluid and Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring ★Shipboard ApprovalsStandard StandardSBS American Bureau of Shipping ★Display and Interface OptionsStandard StandardM4(10) LCD Display with Local Operator Interface ★M5 LCD Display ★Transient ProtectionStandard StandardT1(11) Transient terminal block ★PlantWeb Control FunctionalityStandard StandardA01(12) FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite ★PlantWeb Diagnostic FunctionalityStandard StandardD01(12) FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostic Suite ★Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and ProtocolStandard StandardWA3 User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART ★Antenna and SmartPowerStandard StandardTable A-10. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
117Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataWP5 Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) ★Lower Power OutputStandard StandardC2(13) 0.8-3.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on Hart Protocol ★Alarm LimitStandard StandardC4(13)(14) NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, High Alarm ★CN(13)(14) NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, Low Alarm ★Hardware AdjustmentsStandard StandardDZ Digital Zero Sensor Trim Configuration Button ★Ground ScrewStandard StandardV5(15) External Ground Screw Assembly ★Typical Model Number: 2051CFP D S 010 W1 S 0500 D3 2 A A 1 E5 M5(1) To improve pipe perpendicularity for gasket sealing, socket diameter is smaller than standard pipe O.D.(2) Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration. (3) Thermowell Material is the same as the body material.(4) Does not apply to Process Connection codes T1 and S1.(5) Not available for bore sizes 0010, 0014, 0020, or 0034.(6) Not available with DIN Process Connection codes D1, D2, or D3.(7) Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.(8) Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Profibus (Output Code W).(9) Not available with Low Power code M.(10) Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.(11) The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO Product Certification code IA.(12) Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus Output Code F.(13) Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Profibus (Output Code W).(14) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.(15) The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.Table A-10. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
118Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix A: Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix B: Product CertificationsJune 2012119Product CertificationsAppendix B Product CertificationsWireless Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 119B.1 Wireless CertificationsB.1.1 Approved manufacturing locationsRosemount Inc. — Chanhassen, Minnesota USAFisher-Rosemount GmbH & Co. — Wessling, GermanyEmerson Process Management Asia Pacific Private Limited — SingaporeBeijing Rosemount Far East Instrument Co., LTD — Beijing, ChinaB.1.2 European directive informationThe EC declaration of conformity can be found on . The most recent revision can be found at www.rosemount.com. B.1.3 Telecommunication complianceAll wireless devices require certification to ensure that they adhere to regulations regarding the use of the RF spectrum. Nearly every country requires this type of product certification. Emerson is working with governmental agencies around the world to supply fully compliant products and remove the risk of violating country directives or laws governing wireless device usage. B.1.4 FCC and ICThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 20 cm from all persons.B.1.5 Ordinary location certification for FMAs standard, the transmitter has been examined and tested to determine that the design meets basic electrical, mechanical, and fire protection requirements by FM, a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as accredited by the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
120Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix B: Product CertificationsJune 2012Product CertificationsB.1.6 North American certificationsFactory Mutual (FM) approvalsI5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Non-Incendive, and Dust Ignition-proof.Intrinsically Safe for Class I/II/III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G.Zone Marking: Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia llCTemperature Codes T4 (Tamb = -50 to 70 °C)Non-Incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D.Dust Ignition-proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G.Ambient temperature limits: -50 to 85 °CFor use with Rosemount power module P/N 00753-9220-0001 only.Enclosure Type 4X / IP66/68B.1.7 CSA - Canadian Standards AssociationI6 CSA Intrinsically SafeIntrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D.Temp Code T3CEnclosure Type 4X / IP66/68For use with Rosemount power module P/N 00753-9220-0001 only.B.1.8 European certificationsI1 ATEX Intrinsic SafetyCertificate No.: BAS01ATEX1303X II 1GEx ia IIC T4 (Ta = -60 °C to 70 °C) For use with Rosemount power module options 00753-9220-0001 only.IP66/68 1180Special Conditions for Safe Use (X)The surface resistivity of the antenna is greater than one gigaohm. To avoid electrostatic charge build-up, it must not be rubbed or cleaned with solvents or a dry cloth.I7 IECEx Intrinsic SafetyCertificate No.: IECEx BAS 04.0017XEx ia IIC T4 (Ta = -60 °C to 70 °C) For use with Rosemount power module options 00753-9220-0001 only.IP66/68Special Conditions for Safe Use (X)The surface resistivity of the antenna is greater than one gigaohm. To avoid electrostatic charge build-up, it must not be rubbed or cleaned with solvents or a dry cloth.
121Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix B: Product CertificationsJune 2012Product CertificationsB.1.9 Japanese Certifications I4 TIIS Intrinsic SafetyEx ia IIC T4B.1.10 China (NEPSI) CertificationsI3 China Intrinsic SafetyCertificate No. (manufactured in Chanhassen, MN): GYJ081078 Certificate No. (manufactured in Beijing, China): GYJ06367 Certificate No. (manufactured in Singapore): GYJ06365Ex ia IIC T4Special Conditions for Safe Use (X)See appropriate certificate.Certificate DescriptionTC18649 2051_CD/CG/LD/LGTC18650 2051_CA/TA/TG/LATC18657 2051FA/SFC/SFP
122Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAAppendix B: Product CertificationsJune 2012Product Certifications
Reference Manual00809-0100-4102, Rev AAJune 2012Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale can be found at www.rosemount.com/terms_of_saleThe Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co.Rosemount. the Rosemount logotype, and SMART FAMILY are registered trademarks of Rosemount Inc.Coplanar is a trademark of Rosemount Inc.Halocarbon is a trademark of the Halocarbon Products Corporation.o.Fluorinert is a registered trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company CorporationSyltherm 800 and D.C. 200 are registered trademarks of Dow Corning Corporation.Neobee M-20 is a registered trademark of PVO International, Inc.HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation.Foundation fieldbus is a registered trademark of the Fieldbus Foundation.All other marks are the property of their respective owners.© June 2012 Rosemount, Inc. All rights reserved.Emerson Process Management GmbH & Co.Argelsrieder Feld 382234 WesslingGermanyTel 49 (8153) 9390Fax 49 (8153) 939172Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Private Limited1 Pandan CrescentSingapore 128461T (65) 6777 8211F (65) 6777 0947Enquiries@AP.EmersonProcess.comBeijing Rosemount Far EastInstrument Co., LimitedNo. 6 North Street, Hepingli, Dong Cheng DistrictBeijing 100013, ChinaT (86) (10) 6428 2233F (86) (10) 6422 8586Emerson Process ManagementRosemount Measurement8200 Market BoulevardChanhassen MN 55317 USATel (USA) 1 800 999 9307Tel (International) +1 952 906 8888Fax +1 952 906 8889
Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAJune 2012Rosemount 3051 Wireless Series Pressure, Level, and Flow Solutions with WirelessHART™ Protocol
Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AATitle PageJune 2012iRosemount 3051 Wireless Series Scalable Pressure, Flow, and Level SolutionsRead this manual before working with the product. For personal and system safety, and for optimum product performance, make sure you thoroughly understand the contents before installing, using, or maintaining this product.For technical assistance, contacts are listed below:Customer CentralTechnical support, quoting, and order-related questions.United States - 1-800-999-9307 (7:00 am to 7:00 pm CST) Asia Pacific- 65 777 8211Europe/ Middle East/ Africa - 49 (8153) 9390North American Response CenterEquipment service needs.1-800-654-7768 (24 hours—includes Canada)Outside of these areas, contact your local Emerson Process Management representative.The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified applications. Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require nuclear-qualified hardware or products may cause inaccurate readings.For information on Emerson Process Management nuclear-qualified products, contact your local Rosemount Sales Representative.
iiReference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AATitle PageJune 2012Explosions could result in death or serious injury: Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review the approvals section of the 3051 reference manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation.Before connecting a HART-based communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices.This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions.This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.This device must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 8 in. (20 cm) from all persons.The Power Module may be replaced in a hazardous area. The Power Module has surface resistivity greater than one gigaohm and must be properly installed in the wireless device enclosure. Care must be taken during transportation to and from the point of installation to prevent a potential electrostatic charging hazard.Polymer enclosure has surface resistivity greater than one gigaohm. Care must be taken during transportation to and from the point of installation to prevent a potential electrostatic charging hazard.Process leaks may cause harm or result in death.To avoid process leaks, only use the o-ring designed to seal with the corresponding flange adapter. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.Avoid contact with the leads and the terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock.The Rosemount 3051 and all other wireless devices should be installed only after the Smart Wireless Gateway has been installed and is functioning properly. Wireless devices should also be powered up in order of proximity from the Smart Wireless Gateway, beginning with the closest. This will result in a simpler and faster network installation.
iiiReference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AATitle PageJune 2012Shipping considerations for wireless products (Lithium Batteries: Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF):The unit was shipped to you without the Power Module installed. Please remove the Power Module from the unit prior to shipping.Each power module contains one “D” size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery. Primary lithium batteries are regulated in transportation by the U.S. Department of Transportation, and are also covered by IATA (International Air Transport Association), ICAO (International Civil Aviation Organization), and ARD (European Ground Transportation of Dangerous Goods). It is the responsibility of the shipper to ensure compliance with these or any other local requirements. Please consult current regulations and requirements before shipping.The power module with the wireless unit contains one “D” size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF). Each battery contains approximately 5.0 grams of lithium. Under normal conditions, the battery materials are self-contained and are not reactive as long as the battery and the pack integrity are maintained. Care should be taken to prevent thermal, electrical or mechanical damage. Contacts should be protected to prevent premature discharge.Battery hazards remain when cells are discharged.Power modules should be stored in a clean and dry area. For maximum battery life, storagetemperature should not exceed 30 °C (86 °F).The Power Module may be replaced in a hazardous area. The Power Module has surface resistivity greater than one gigaohm and must be properly installed in the wireless device enclosure. Care must be taken during transportation to and from the point of installation to prevent electrostatic charge build-up.Using the Rosmeount 3051 Wireless Pressure Transmitter in a manner other than what is specified by the menufacturer may impair the protection provided by the equipment.
ivReference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AATitle PageJune 2012
vReference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AATable of ContentsJune 2012Table of Contents 1Section 1: Introduction1.1 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.2 Models Covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.2.1 Rosemount 3051CD Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.2.2 Rosemount 3051CG Gage Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.2.3 Rosemount 3051CA Absolute Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.2.4 Rosemount 3051T Gage and Absolute Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . .21.2.5 Rosemount 3051L Liquid Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21.3 WirelessHART installation flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.4 Transmitter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.5 Considerations before transmitter installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51.5.1 Wireless considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51.5.2 Mechanical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61.5.3 Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61.5.4 Environmental. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61.6 Service support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71.7 Product Recycling/Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 2Section 2: Configuration2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92.2 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92.2.1 Warnings (). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102.3 Required Bench Top Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102.3.1 Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102.4 Device Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112.4.1 Join Device to Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112.4.2 Configure Update Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122.4.3 Remove Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122.5 Review Configuration Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132.5.1 Review Pressure Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132.5.2 Review Device Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132.5.3 Review Sensor Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152.5.4 Review Radio Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152.6 Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162.7 Check Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17Contents
viReference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AATable of ContentsJune 2012Table of Contents2.7.1 Operating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172.8 Basic Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172.8.1 Set Process Variable Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172.8.2 Set Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192.8.3 Damping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202.8.4 Write Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202.9 LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.9.1 LCD Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.10Detailed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222.10.1Configure Process Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222.10.2Sensor Temperature Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232.11Diagnostics and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232.11.1Master Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232.11.2Join Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232.11.3Number of Available Neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242.12Advanced Functions for HART Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252.12.1Saving, Recalling, and Cloning Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 3Section 3: Installation3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273.2 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273.2.1 Warnings (). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283.3 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293.3.2 Wireless. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293.3.3 Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293.3.4 Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303.4 Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313.4.1 Mount the Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313.4.2 Process Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343.4.3 Consider Housing Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363.4.4 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363.4.5 Power Module Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373.4.6 Installing the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373.5 Rosemount 304, 305 and 306 Integral Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383.5.1 Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold Installation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 393.5.2 Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold Installation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 393.5.3 Rosemount 304 Conventional Manifold Installation Procedure. . . . . . . . 403.5.4 Manifold Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
viiReference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AATable of ContentsJune 2012Table of Contents 4Section 4: Commissioning4.1 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474.1.1 Warnings (). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474.2 Network Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484.3 Verify Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 5Section 5: Operation and Maintenance5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515.2 Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515.2.1 Sensor Trim Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525.2.2 Zero Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535.2.3 Sensor Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535.2.4 Recall Factory Trim—Sensor Trim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545.2.5 Line Pressure Effect (Range 2 and Range 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545.2.6 Compensating for Line Pressure (Range 4 and Range 5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545.3 LCD Screen Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575.3.1 Startup Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575.3.2 Diagnostic Button Screen Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595.3.3 Network Diagnostic Status Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605.3.4 Device Diagnostic Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 6Section 6: Troubleshooting6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676.2 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676.2.1 Warnings (). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686.3 Disassembly Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726.3.1 Removing from Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726.3.2 Removing the electronics board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .736.3.3 Removing the sensor from the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .746.4 Reassembly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .756.5 Reassembly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .756.5.1 Attaching electronics board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .756.5.2 Reassembling the 3051C process flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .756.5.3 Installing drain/vent valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
viiiReference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AATable of ContentsJune 2012Table of Contents AAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataA.1 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79A.1.1 Conformance to specification (±3s (Sigma)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79A.1.2 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79A.1.3 Reference Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80A.1.4 Flow performance - flow reference accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80A.1.5 Total Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81A.1.6 Long Term Stability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82A.1.7 Dynamic Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82A.1.8 Line Pressure Effect per 1000 psi (6,9 MPa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82A.1.9 Ambient Temperature Effect per 50°F (28°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83A.1.10Mounting Position Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83A.1.11Vibration Effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83A.1.12Power Supply Effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83A.1.13Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83A.2 Functional Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84A.2.1 Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84A.2.2 Range and Sensor Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85A.2.3 Zero and Span Adjustment Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85A.3 Wireless Self-Organizing Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86A.3.1 Overpressure Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86A.3.2 Static Pressure Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87A.3.3 Burst Pressure Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87A.3.4 Temperature limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87A.3.5 Humidity Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88A.3.6 Volumetric Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88A.3.7 Damping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88A.4 Physical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89A.4.1 Process Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89A.4.2 Process-Wetted Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89A.4.3 Rosemount 3051L process wetted parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90A.4.4 Non-Wetted Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90A.4.5 Shipping Weights for 3051 Wireless Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . .91A.5 Dimensional Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93A.5.1 Ordering Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95A.5.2 Rosemount 3051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
ixReference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AATable of ContentsJune 2012Table of ContentsA.5.3 Rosemount 3051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101A.5.4 Rosemount 3051CF Flowmeter Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105A.5.5 Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121A.6 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126A.7 Spare parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 BAppendix B: Product CertificationsB.1 Wireless Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143B.1.1 Approved manufacturing locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143B.1.2 European directive information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143B.1.3 Telecommunication compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143B.1.4 FCC and IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143B.1.5 Ordinary location certification for FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143B.1.6 North American certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144B.1.7 CSA - Canadian Standards Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144B.1.8 European certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144B.1.9 Japanese Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145B.1.10China (NEPSI) Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
xReference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AATable of ContentsJune 2012Table of Contents
1Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 1: IntroductionJune 2012IntroductionSection 1 IntroductionUsing This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1Models Covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1Service support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7Product Recycling/Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 81.1 Using This ManualThe sections in this manual provide information on installing, operating, and maintaining the Rosemount 3051 Wireless pressure transmitter with WirelessHART™ protocol. The sections are organized as follows:Section 2: Configuration provides instruction on commissioning and operating 3051 Wireless transmitters. Information on software functions, configuration parameters, and online variables is also included. Section 3: Installation contains mechanical and electrical installation instructions.Section 4: Commissioning contains techniques for properly commissioning the device.Section 5: Operation and Maintenance contains operation and maintenance techniques.Section 6: Troubleshooting provides troubleshooting techniques for the most common operating problems. Section A: Specifications and Reference Data supplies reference and specification data, as well as ordering information.Section B: Product Certifications contains approval information.1.2 Models CoveredThe following Rosemount 3051 Pressure Transmitters are covered by this manual:1.2.1 Rosemount 3051CD Differential Pressure TransmitterMeasures differential pressure up to 2000 psi (137,9 bar).1.2.2 Rosemount 3051CG Gage Pressure TransmitterMeasures gage pressure up to 2000 psi (137,9 bar).1.2.3 Rosemount 3051CA Absolute Pressure TransmitterMeasures absolute pressure up to 4000 psia (275,8 bar).
2Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 1: IntroductionJune 2012Introduction1.2.4 Rosemount 3051T Gage and Absolute Pressure TransmitterMeasures gage pressure up to 10000 psi (689,5 bar).1.2.5 Rosemount 3051L Liquid Level TransmitterProvides precise level and specific gravity measurements up to 300 psi (20,7 bar) for a wide variety of tank configurations.
3Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 1: IntroductionJune 2012Introduction1.3 WirelessHART installation flowchartFigure 1-1. WirelessHART installation flowchartYesSTART HEREBench Calibration? Field InstallNoSet Units(page 21)Set Range Points(page 23)Select Linear Output(page 22)Set Damping(page 27)VerifyApply PressureYesWithinSpecifications?NoRefer toSection 5: Operation and MaintenanceMount Transmitter(page 48)Install Power Module(page 71)Trim the Transmitter (page 82)DoneReview Transmitter Configuration(page 20)Confirm Transmitter Configuration(page 20)Configure for PressureConfigure Scaled Variable(page 31)Set Scaled Variable to PV(page 31)Configure for Level Configure for FlowConfigure Scaled Variable(page 31)Set Scaled Variable to PV(page 34)Check Process Connection(page 56)Configure Network IDConfigure Join KeyConfigure Update Rate
4Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 1: IntroductionJune 2012Introduction1.4 Transmitter overviewThe Rosemount 3051C Coplanar design is offered for Differential Pressure (DP), Gage Pressure (GP) and Absolute Pressure (AP) measurements. The Rosemount 3051C utilizes capacitance sensor technology for DP and GP measurements. The Rosemount 3051T and 3051CA utilize piezoresistive sensor technology for AP and GP measurements.The major components of the Rosemount 3051 Wireless transmitter are the sensor module and the electronics housing. The sensor module contains the oil filled sensor system (isolating diaphragms, oil fill system, and sensor) and the sensor electronics. The sensor electronics are installed within the sensor module and include a temperature sensor, a memory module, and the analog to digital signal converter (A/D converter). The electrical signals from the sensor module are transmitted to the output electronics in the electronics housing. The electronics housing contains the output electronics board, the wireless antenna, and the battery. The basic block diagram of the Rosemount 3051CD Wireless device is illustrated in Figure X-X on page X.For the Rosemount 3051, pressure is applied to the isolating diaphragm(s). The oil deflects the sensor which then changes its capacitance or voltage signal. This signal is then changed to a digital signal by the Signal Processing. The microprocessor then takes the signals from the Signal Processing and calculates the correct output of the transmitter. This signal is then sent via wireless communication to the Gateway.An optional LCD can be ordered that connects directly to the interface board which maintains direct access to the signal terminals. The display indicates output and abbreviated diagnostic messages. A glass display cover is provided. For WirelessHART output, the LCD Display features a two-line display. The first line displays the actual measured value, the second line of six characters displays the engineering units. The LCD can also display diagnostics messages.NoteLCD Display utilizes a 5x6 character display and can display output and diagnostic messages. See Figure 1-2.Figure 1-2. LCD/LOI DisplayLCD Display
5Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 1: IntroductionJune 2012IntroductionFigure 1-3. Block diagram of operation A. Sensor ModuleB. Electronics BoardC. WirelessHART Signal to Control SystemD. Field Communicator1.5 Considerations before transmitter installation1.5.1 Wireless considerationsPower up sequenceThe Smart Wireless Gateway (Gateway) should be installed and functioning properly before any wireless devices are powered. Install the power module, SmartPower Solutions, model number 701PGNKF green power module, into the 3051 to power the device. This results in a simpler and faster network installation. Enabling Active Advertising on the Gateway ensures that new devices are able to join the network faster. For more information see the Smart Wireless Gateway Reference Manual (Document No. 00809-0200-4420).Antenna positionThe antenna is internal to the pressure transmitter. To achieve optimal range, orient the transmitter with the sensor horizontal and the power module closest to the ground as shown in Figure X-X. Good connectivity can also be achieved in other orientations. The antenna should ABCDSignal ProcessingTemp. SensorSensor Module MemoryMicroprocessorSensor linearizationRerangeDampingDiagnosticsEngineering unitsCommunicationMemoryConfigurationDigital-to-Analog Signal ConversionWirelessHART Communication
6Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 1: IntroductionJune 2012Introductionalso be approximately 1 m (3 ft.) from any large structure, building, or conductive surface to allow for clear communication to other devices. Refer to best practices for additional information on optimal mounting locations of device.Recommended practicesWhen mounting the device, recommended practices should be considered to achieve the best wireless performance. See Appendix X for more information on recommended practices.1.5.2 MechanicalLocationWhen choosing an installation location and position, take into account access to the power module compartment for easy power module replacementElectronics CoverThe electronics cover is tightened so that polymer contacts polymer. When removing the electronics cover, ensure that there is no damage done to the o-ring. If damaged replace before reattaching cover, ensuring polymer contacts polymer.1.5.3 ElectricalPower ModuleThe Rosemount 3051 Wireless Pressure Transmitter is self-powered. The power module contains one "D" size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF). Each battery contains approximately 5.0 grams of lithium. Under normal conditions, the battery materials are self-contained and are not reactive as long as the battery and the power module are maintained. Care should be taken to prevent thermal, electrical, or mechanical damage. Contacts should be protected to prevent premature discharge.Use caution when handling the power module, it may be damaged if dropped from heights in excess of 6.10 m (20 ft).1.5.4 EnvironmentalVerify that the operating atmosphere of the transmitter is consistent with the appropriate hazardous locations certifications.Temperature EffectsThe transmitter will operate within specifications for ambient temperatures between -40 and 85 °C (-40 and 185 °F).Heat from the process is transferred to the transmitter housing. If the process temperature is high, the ambient temperature will need to be lower to account for heat transferred to the transmitter housing. See Table 1-1 on page 1-7 for process temperature derating.
7Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 1: IntroductionJune 2012IntroductionTable 1-1. Temperature Derating1.6 Service supportWithin the United States, call the Emerson Process Management Instrument and Valve Response Center using the 1-800-654-RSMT (7768) toll-free number. This center, available 24 hours a day, will assist you with any needed information or materials.The center will ask for product model and serial numbers, and will provide a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number. The center will also ask for the process material to which the product was last exposed.For inquiries outside of the United States, contact the nearest Emerson Process Management representative for RMA instructions.To expedite the return process outside of the United States, contact the nearest Emerson Process Management representative.Process Temperature (°C)Process Temperature (°F)Max Ambient (°C)Max Ambient (°F)260 500 41 105.8240 464 45 113220 428 49 120.2200 392 53 127.4180 356 57 134.6160 320 61 141.8140 284 64 147.2120 248 68 154.4100 212 72 161.685 185 75 167Individuals who handle products exposed to a hazardous substance can avoid injury if they are informed of and understand the hazard. The product being returned will require a copy of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each substance must be included with the returned goods.
8Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 1: IntroductionJune 2012IntroductionThe Power Module contains one “D” size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF). Each Power Module contains approximately 5 grams of lithium. Under normal conditions, the Power Module materials are self-contained and are not reactive as long as the batteries and the module integrity are maintained. Care should be taken to prevent thermal, electrical or mechanical damage. Contacts should be protected to prevent premature discharge. Power Module hazards remain when cells are discharged.Power Module should be stored in a clean and dry area. For maximum battery life, storage temperature should not exceed 30° C.Emerson Process Management Instrument and Valve Response Center representatives will explain the additional information and procedures necessary to return goods exposed to hazardous substances.1.7 Product Recycling/DisposalRecycling of equipment and packaging should be taken into consideration and disposed of in accordance with local and national legislation/regulations.Shipping considerations for wireless products (Lithium Batteries: Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF):The unit was shipped to you without the Power Module installed. Please remove the Power Module from the unit prior to shipping.Each power module contains one “D” size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery. Primary lithium batteries are regulated in transportation by the U.S. Department of Transportation, and are also covered by IATA (International Air Transport Association), ICAO (International Civil Aviation Organization), and ARD (European Ground Transportation of Dangerous Goods). It is the responsibility of the shipper to ensure compliance with these or any other local requirements. Please consult current regulations and requirements before shipping.
Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 20129ConfigurationSection 2 ConfigurationOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9Required Bench Top Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10Device Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 11Review Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 16Check Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 21Detailed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 22Diagnostics and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 23Advanced Functions for HART Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 252.1 OverviewThis section contains information on configuration and verification that should be performed prior to installation. Field Communicator and AMS instructions are given to perform configuration functions. For convenience, Field Communicator fast key sequences are labeled “Fast Keys” for each software function below the appropriate headings.Example software function2.2 Safety MessagesProcedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.Fast Keys 1, 2, 3, etc.
10Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.2.1 Warnings ( )2.3 Required Bench Top ConfigurationBench top configuration requires a Field Communicator, AMS, or any WirelessHART Communicator. Connect the Field Communicator leads to the terminals labeled “COMM” on the terminal block. See Figure 2-1 on page 11.Bench top configuration consists of testing the transmitter and verifying transmitter configuration data. 3051 Wireless transmitters must be configured before installation. Configuring the transmitter on the bench before installation using a Field Communicator, AMS, or any WirelessHART Communicator ensures that all network settings are working correctly.When using a Field Communicator, any configuration changes made must be sent to the transmitter by using the “Send” key (F2). AMS configuration changes are implemented when the “Apply” button is clicked.AMS Wireless ConfiguratorAMS is capable of connecting to devices either directly, using a HART modem, or wirelessly via the Smart Wireless Gateway. When configuring the device, double click the device icon or right click and select Configure.2.3.1 Connection Diagrams Bench Hook-upConnect the bench equipment as shown in Figure 2-1 on page 11, and turn on the Field Communicator by pressing the ON/OFF key or log into AMS. The Field Communicator or AMS will search for a HART-compatible device and indicate when the connection is made. If the Field Communicator or AMS fail to connect, it indicates that no device was found. If this occurs, refer to Section 6: Troubleshooting.Explosions can result in death or serious injury.Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or nonincendive field wiring practices.Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock.This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: This device may not cause harmful interference this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.This device must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 20cm from all persons.
11Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012ConfigurationField Hook-upFigure 2-1 on page 11 illustrates the wiring for a field hook-up with a Field Communicator or AMS. The Field Communicator or AMS may be connected at “COMM” on the transmitter terminal block.Figure 2-1. Field Communicator ConnectionFor HART communication, a 3051 WirelessHART DD is required.2.4 Device Network Configuration2.4.1 Join Device to NetworkIn order to communicate with the Smart Wireless Gateway, and ultimately the Host System, the transmitter must be configured to communicate over the wireless network. This step is the wireless equivalent of connecting wires from a transmitter to the host system. 1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 1: Guided Setup.3. Select 1: Join Device to Network.Using a Field Communicator or AMS, enter the Network ID and Join Key so that they match the Network ID and Join Key of the Smart Wireless Gateway and other devices in the network. If the Network ID and Join Key are not identical to those set in the Gateway, the transmitter will not communicate with the network. The Network ID and Join Key may be obtained from the Smart Wireless Gateway on the Setup>Network>Settings page on the web server.Fast Keys 2, 1, 1
12Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.4.2 Configure Update RateThe Update Rate is the frequency at which a new measurement is taken and transmitted over the wireless network. This by default is 1 minute. This may be changed at commissioning, or at any time via AMS Wireless Configurator. The Update Rate is user selectable from 8 seconds to 60 minutes. 1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 1: Guided Setup.3. Select 2: Configure Update Rate.When device configuration is completed, remove the Power Module and replace the housing cover. Tighten the cover so that metal contacts metal.2.4.3 Remove Power ModuleAfter the sensor and network have been configured, remove the Power Module and replace the housing cover. The Power Module should be inserted only when the device is ready to be commissioned.Use caution when handling the Power Module. The Power Module may be damaged if dropped from heights in excess of 20 ft.Fast Keys 2, 1, 2
13Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.5 Review Configuration DataThe following is a list of factory default configurations that can be viewed by using the Field Communicator or AMS. Follow the steps below to review the transmitter configuration information.NoteInformation and procedures in this section that make use of Field Communicator fast key sequences and AMS assume that the transmitter and communication equipment are connected, powered, and operating correctly.2.5.1 Review Pressure InformationTo view pressure information:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 2: Pressure.4. Select from the corresponding number to view each field:2.5.2 Review Device InformationTo view device information:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 4: Device Information.4. Select 3: Device.5. Select from the corresponding number to view each field:Fast Keys 2, 2, 21Unit2Transfer Function3Damping4Upper Range Value5Lower Range Value6Maximum7Minimum8Minimum SpanFast Keys 2, 2, 4, 31Manufacturer2Model
14Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration3Final Assembly Number4Universal5Field Device6Software7Hardware8Descriptor9Message10 Date11 Model Number I12 Model Number II13 Model Number III14 SI Unit Restriction15 Country16 Device ID
15Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.5.3 Review Sensor InformationTo view sensor information:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 4: Device Information.4. Select 4: Sensor.5. Select from the corresponding number to view each field:2.5.4 Review Radio InformationTo view radio information:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 4: Device Information.4. Select 5: Radio.5. Select from the corresponding number to view each field:Fast Keys 2, 2, 4, 41Measurement Type2Module Type3Module Serial Number4Sensor MaterialsIsolator MaterialFill Fluid5Process ConnectorConnector TypeConnector MaterialO Ring MaterialDrain Vent Material6Remote SealNumber of SealsSeal TypeDiaphragm MaterialSeal Fill FluidFast Keys 2, 2, 4, 51Manufacturer2Device Type3Device Revision4Software Revision5Hardware Revision
16Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.6 Field Communicator1. Overview2. Configure3. Service Tools1. Active Alerts2. Communication Status3. Pressure4. Pressure Status5. Last Update Time1. Join Device to Network2. Configure Update Rate3. Zero Trim4. Configure Device Display5. Configure Process Alarms6. Basic Setup1. Guided Setup2. Manual Setup3. Alert Setup1. Wireless2. Pressure3. Device Temperatures4. Device Information5. Device Display6. Other 1. Network ID2. Join Device to Network3. Broadcast Rates4. Configure Broadcast Power Level5. Power Mode6. Power Source 1. Unit2. Transfer Function3. Damping4. Upper Range Value5. Lower Range Value6. Maximum7. Minimum8. Minimum Span9. Range Using Applied Value1. Sensor Temperature2. Electronics Temperature1. Unit2. Maximum 3. Minimum1. HI-HI Alarm2. HI Alarm3. LO Alarm4. LO-LO Alarm1. Configure LO-LO Alarm2. Mode3. Variable4. Alarm Direction5. Alarm Limit6. Dead Band1. Configure LO Alarm2. Mode3. Variable4. Alarm Direction5. Alarm Limit6. Dead Band1. Configure HI-HI Alarm2. Mode3. Variable4. Alarm Direction5. Alarm Limit6. Dead Band1. Configure HI Alarm2. Mode3. Variable4. Alarm Direction5. Alarm Limit6. Dead Band1. Mode2. Display Options1. Measurement and Status Log 1. Alerts2. Variables3. Communications4. Routine Maintenance5. Simulate1. Active Alerts2. History1. Percent of Range2. Pressure3. Pressure Status4. Sensor Temperature5. Sensor Temperature Status6. Electronics Temperature7. Electronics Temp Status8. Supply Voltage9. Supply Voltage Status10. Last Update Time1. Join Status2. Communication Status3. Join Mode4. Number of Available Neighbors 5. Number of Advertisements Heard6. Number of Join Attempts1. Sensor Calibration2. Other1. Current Lower Trim2. Current Upper Trim3. Zero Sensor Trim4. Lower Sensor Trim5. Upper Sensor Trim6. Recall Factory Trim1. Master Reset2. Measurement History3. Advertise to New Devices1. Pressure2. Sensor Temperature3. Electronics Temperature4. Supply Voltage1. Tag2. Long Tag3. Device4. Sensor5. Radio6. Write Protect1. Manufacturer2. Model3. Final Assembly Number4. Universal5. Field Device6. Software7. Hardware8. Descriptor9. Message10. Date11. Model Number I12. Model Number II13. Model Number III14. SI Unit Restriction15. Country16. Device ID1. Measurement Type2. Module Type3. Module Serial Number4. Sensor Materials5. Process Connector6. Remote Seal1. Isolator Fluid2. Fill Fluid1. Number of Seals2. Seal Type3. Diaphragm Material4. Seal Fill Fluid1. Connector Type2. Connector Material3. O Ring Material4. Drain Vent Material1. Manufacturer2. Device Type3. Device Revision4. Software Revision5. Hardware Revision1. Configure Update Rate2. Message 13. Message 2
17Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.7 Check OutputBefore performing other transmitter operations, ensure that the transmitter is operating properly by checking the operating parameters.2.7.1 Operating ParametersThe pressure output value in both engineering units and percent of range will reflect the applied pressure even when the applied pressure is outside of the configured range as long as the applied pressure is between the upper and lower range limit of the transmitter. For example, if a Range 2 3051T (LRL = 0 psi, URL = 150 psi) is ranged from 0 to 100 psi, an applied pressure of 150 psi will return a % of range output of 150% and an engineering output of 150 psi.To view the Operating Parameters menu:1. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.2. Select 2: Variables.The Operating Parameters menu displays the following information pertaining to the device:Percent of RangePressurePressure StatusSensor TemperatureSensor Temperature StatusElectronics TemperatureElectronics Temperature StatusSupply VoltageSupply Voltage StatusLast Update Time2.8 Basic Setup2.8.1 Set Process Variable UnitThe PV Unit command sets the process variable units to allow you to monitor your process using the appropriate units of measure. To select a unit of measure for the PV:Fast Keys 3, 2Fast Keys 2, 2, 2, 1
18Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 2: Pressure.4. Select 1: Unit to select from the following engineering units:inH2Obar torrinHg mbar atmftH2Og/cm2MPammH2Okg/cm2inH2O at 4 °CmmHg Pa mmH2O at 4 °Cpsi kPa 
19Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.8.2 Set Transfer FunctionThe 3051 Wireless has two output settings: Linear and Square Root. Activate the square root output option to make output proportional to flow. As input approaches zero, the 3051 Wireless automatically switches to linear output in order to ensure a more smooth, stable output near zero (see Figure 2-2).From 0 to 0.6 percent of the ranged pressure input, the slope of the curve is unity (y = x). This allows accurate calibration near zero. Greater slopes would cause large changes in output (for small changes at input). From 0.6 percent to 0.8 percent, curve slope equals 42 (y = 42x) to achieve continuous transition from linear to square root at the transition point.To select the output transfer function:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 2: Pressure.4. Select 2: Transfer Function and choose either Linear or Square Root.Figure 2-2. Square Root Output Transition PointFast Keys 2, 2, 2, 2Sq. Root CurveTransition PointLinear SectionSlope=1Slope=42Transition PointSq. Root CurveFull Scale Flow (%)
20Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.8.3 DampingThe Damping command introduces a delay in processing which increases the response time of the transmitter; smoothing variations in output readings caused by rapid input changes. In the 3051 Wireless pressure transmitter, damping only takes effect when the device is placed in high power refresh mode and during calibration. In normal power mode, the effective damping is 0. Note that when the device is in high power refresh mode, battery power will be depleted rapidly. Determine the appropriate damp setting based on the necessary response time, signal stability, and other requirements of the loop dynamics of your system. The damping value of your device is user selectable from 0 to 25.6 seconds. To determine the current damping value:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 2: Pressure.4. Select 3: Damping.2.8.4 Write ProtectThe 3051 Wireless has a software write protect security feature.The view write protect security settings:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 4: Device Information.4. Select 6: Write Protect.Fast Keys 2, 2, 2, 3Fast Keys 2, 2, 4, 6
21Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.9 LCD Display2.9.1 LCD Display ConfigurationThe LCD display indicates output and abbreviated diagnostic messages. NoteUse Rosemount Wireless LCD Part Number: 00753-9004-0002.The LCD display features a four-line display and a bar graph. The first line of five characters displays the output description, the second line of seven digits displays the actual value, the third line of six characters displays engineering units and the fourth line displays “Error” when the transmitter is in alarm. The LCD display can also display diagnostic messages. The bar graph represents the network connectivity status.See “LCD Screen Messages” on page 57 for more information on LCD messages.To configure LCD display options:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 1: Guided Setup.3. Select 4: Configure Device Display.Fast Keys 2, 1, 4
22Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.10 Detailed Setup2.10.1 Configure Process AlarmsAlerts allow the user to configure the transmitter to output a HART message when the configured data point is exceeded. A process alert will be transmitted continuously if the set points are exceeded and the alert mode is ON. An alert will be displayed on a Field Communicator, AMS status screen or in the error section of the LCD display. The alert will reset once the value returns within range.NoteHI alert value must be higher than the LO alert value. Both alert values must be within the pressure or temperature sensor limits.Example 1: Rising AlertExample 2: Falling AlertTo configure the process alerts, perform the following procedure:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 1: Guided Setup.3. Select 5: Configure Process Alarms and follow the on-screen instructions to complete configure of process alarms.Fast Keys 2, 1, 5DeadbandAssigned ValueAlert Set PointAlert “OFF” Alert “ON” Alert “OFF”Units of MeasurementTimeDeadbandAssigned ValueAlert Set PointAlert “OFF” Alert “ON” Alert “OFF”Units of MeasurementTime
23Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.10.2 Sensor Temperature Unit The Sensor Temperature Unit command selects between Celsius and Fahrenheit units for the sensor temperature. The sensor temperature output is accessible via HART only.To select the sensor temperature unit:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 2: Manual Setup.3. Select 3: Device Temperatures.4. Select 1: Sensor Temperature.5. Select 1: Unit to select from Celsius or Fahrenheit.2.11 Diagnostics and ServiceDiagnostics and service functions listed below are primarily for use after field installation. The Transmitter Test feature is designed to verify that the transmitter is operating properly, and can be performed either on the bench or in the field. 2.11.1 Master Reset The master reset function will reset the device electronics. To perform a master reset:1. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.2. Select 4: Routine Maintenance.3. Select 2: Other.4. Select 1: Master Reset.2.11.2 Join Status To view the join status of the device, perform the following procedure:1. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.2. Select 3: Communications.3. Select 1: Join Status.Fast Keys 2, 2, 3, 1, 1Fast Keys 3, 4, 2, 1Fast Keys 3, 3, 1
24Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012ConfigurationWireless devices join the secure network through a four step process:Step 1. Network FoundStep 2. Network Security Clearance GrantedStep 3. Network Bandwidth AllocatedStep 4. Network Join Complete2.11.3 Number of Available Neighbors In a self-organizing network, the more neighbors a device has, the more robust the network will be. To view the number of available neighbors for the wireless device, perform the following procedure:1. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.2. Select 3: Routine Maintenance.3. Select 4: Number of Available Neighbors.Fast Keys 3, 3, 4
25Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012Configuration2.12 Advanced Functions for HART Protocol2.12.1 Saving, Recalling, and Cloning Configuration DataUse the cloning feature of the Field Communicator or the AMS “User Configuration” feature to configure several 3051 Wireless transmitters similarly. Cloning involves configuring a transmitter, saving the configuration data, then sending a copy of the data to a separate transmitter. Several possible procedures exist when saving, recalling, and cloning configuration data. For complete instructions refer to the Field Communicator manual (publication no. 00809-0100-4276) or AMS Books Online. One common method is as follows:Field Communicator1. Completely configure the first transmitter.2. Save the configuration data:a. Select F2 SAVE from the Field Communicator HOME/ONLINE screen.b. Ensure that the location to which the data will be saved is set to MODULE. If it is not, select 1: Location to set the save location to MODULE.c. Select 2: Name, to name the configuration data. The default is the transmitter tag number.d. Ensure that the data type is set to STANDARD. If the data type is NOT STANDARD, select 3: Data Type to set the data type to STANDARD.e. Select F2 SAVE.3. Connect and power the receiving transmitter and Field Communicator.4. Select the back arrow from the HOME/ONLINE screen. The Field Communicator menu appears.5. Select 1: Offline, 2: Saved Configuration, 1: Module Contents to reach the MODULE CONTENTS menu.6. Use the DOWN ARROW to scroll through the list of configurations in the memory module, and use the RIGHT ARROW to select and retrieve the required configuration.7. Select 1: Edit.8. Select 1: Mark All.9. Select F2 SAVE.10. Use the DOWN ARROW to scroll through the list of configurations in the memory module, and use the RIGHT ARROW to select the configuration again.11. Select 3: Send to download the configuration to the transmitter.12. Select OK after the control loop is set to manual.13. After the configuration has been sent, select OK.Fast Keys left arrow, 1, 2
26Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 2: ConfigurationJune 2012ConfigurationWhen finished, the Field Communicator informs you of the status. Repeat Steps 3 through 13 to configure another transmitter.NoteThe transmitter receiving cloned data must have the same software version (or later) as the original transmitter.AMS creating a Reusable CopyTo create a reusable copy of a configuration perform the following procedure: 1. Completely configure the first transmitter.2. Select View then User Configuration View from the menu bar (or click the toolbar button).3. In the User Configuration window, right click and select New from the context menu. 4. In the New window, select a device from the list of templates shown, and click OK.5. The template is copied into the User Configurations window, with the tag name highlighted; rename it as appropriate and press Enter.NoteA device icon can also be copied by dragging and dropping a device template or any other device icon from AMS Explorer or Device Connection View into the User Configurations window. The “Compare Configurations” window appears, showing the Current values of the copied device on one side and mostly blank fields on the other (User Configuration) side.6. Transfer values from the current configuration to the user configuration as appropriate or enter values by typing them into the available fields.7. Click Apply to apply the values, or click OK to apply the values and close the window.AMS Applying a User ConfigurationAny amount of user configurations can be created for the application. They can also be saved, and applied to connected devices or to devices in the Device List or Plant Database.To apply a user configuration perform the following procedure:1. Select the desired user configuration in the User Configurations window.2. Drag the icon onto a like device in AMS Explorer or Device Connection View. The Compare Configurations window opens, showing the parameters of the target device on one side and the parameters of the user configuration on the other.3. Transfer parameters from the user configuration to the target device as desired, Click OK to apply the configuration and close the window.
Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 201227InstallationSection 3 InstallationOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 27Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 27Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 29Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 31Installing the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 37Rosemount 304, 305 and 306 Integral Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 383.1 OverviewThe information in this section covers installation considerations. A Quick Installation Guide (document number 00825-0100-4100) is shipped with every transmitter to describe basic installation and startup procedures. Dimensional drawings for each Rosemount 3051 Wireless variation and mounting configuration are included in Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data. Field Communicator and AMS instructions are given to perform configuration functions. For convenience, Field Communicator fast key sequences are labeled “Fast Keys” for each software function below the appropriate headings.3.2 Safety MessagesProcedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operation. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated with a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
28Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012Installation3.2.1 Warnings ( )Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or serious injury.Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation.Explosions can result in death or serious injury. Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review the approvals section of the 3051 Wireless reference manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation.Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices.Verify that the operating atmosphere of the transmitter is consistent with the appropriate hazardous locations certifications.Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage may be present on leads can cause electrical shock.Process leaks could result in death or serious injury. Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.Do not attempt to loosen or remove process connectors while the transmitter is in service.Replacement equipment or spare parts not approved by Rosemount Inc. for use as spare parts could reduce the pressure retaining capabilities of the transmitter and may render the instrument dangerous. Use only bolts supplied or sold by Rosemount Inc. as spare parts.Improper assembly of manifolds to traditional flange can damage SuperModule™. For safe assembly of manifold to traditional flange, bolts must break back plane of flange web (i.e., bolt hold) but must not contact module housing.The Power Module with the wireless unit contains one “D” size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF). Each Power Module contains approximately 5 grams of lithium. Under normal conditions, the Power Module materials are self-contained and are not reactive as long as the batteries and the pack integrity are maintained. Care should be taken to prevent thermal, electrical or mechanical damage. Contacts should be protected to prevent premature discharge.
29Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012Installation3.3 Considerations3.3.1 GeneralMeasurement performance depends upon proper installation of the transmitter and impulse piping. Mount the transmitter close to the process and use a minimum of piping to achieve best performance. Also, consider the need for easy access, personnel safety, practical field calibration, and a suitable transmitter environment. Install the transmitter to minimize vibration, shock, and temperature fluctuation.3.3.2 WirelessPower Up SequenceThe Power Module should not be installed on any wireless device until the Smart Wireless Gateway is installed and functioning properly. Wireless devices should also be powered up in order of proximity from the Smart Wireless Gateway beginning with the closest. This will result in a simpler and faster network installation. Enable High Speed Operation on the Gateway to ensure that new devices join the network faster. For more information see the Smart Wireless Gateway Manual (Doc. No. 00809-0200-4420).Field Communicator ConnectionsIn order for the Field Communicator to interface with the 3051, the Power Module must be connected.Figure 3-1. Field Communicator Connections3.3.3 Mechanical NoteFor steam service or for applications with process temperatures greater than the limits of the transmitter, do not blow down impulse piping through the transmitter. Flush lines with the blocking valves closed and refill lines with water before resuming measurement.NoteWhen the transmitter is mounted on its side, position the Coplanar flange to ensure proper venting or draining. Mount the flange as shown in Figure 3.4.2 on page 34, keeping drain/vent connections on the bottom for gas service and on the top for liquid service.
30Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012Installation3.3.4 Environmental Access requirements and cover installation on page 31 can help optimize transmitter performance. Mount the transmitter to minimize ambient temperature changes, vibration, mechanical shock, and to avoid external contact with corrosive materials. Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data lists temperature operating limits.Figure 3-2. Installation FlowchartSTART HEREBench Calibration? Field InstallNoConfigure(Section 2)Set UnitsSet Range PointsSet Network ParametersVerifyApply PressureYesWithinSpecifications? YesNoRefer toSection 4 Operation and MaintenanceCheck Switches (page 36)Mount Transmitter(page 31)Install Power Module(pages 37–36)Check Process Connection(page 34)Trim Transmitter for Mounting Effects(page 52)DoneReview Transmitter Configuration(page 11)Confirm Transmitter Configuration(page 11)
31Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012Installation3.4 Installation ProceduresFor dimensional drawing information refer to “Dimensional Drawings” on page 93.Process Flange OrientationMount the process flanges with sufficient clearance for process connections. For safety reasons, place the drain/vent valves so the process fluid is directed away from possible human contact when the vents are used. In addition, consider the need for a testing or calibration input.Housing RotationSee “Consider Housing Rotation” on page 36.Power Module Side of Electronics HousingMount the transmitter so the Power Module side is accessible. Clearance of 2.75-in. (70 mm) is required for cover removal. Circuit Side of Electronics HousingProvide 0.75 in. (19 mm) of clearance for units with out an LCD display. Three inches of clearance is required for cover removal if a meter is installed.Cover InstallationAlways ensure a proper seal by installing the electronics housing cover(s) so that polymer contacts polymer. Use Rosemount O-rings.3.4.1 Mount the TransmitterMounting BracketsFacilitate mounting transmitter to a 2-in. pipe, or to a panel. The B4 Bracket (SST) option is standard for use with the Coplanar and In-Line flanges. “Coplanar Flange Mounting Configura-tions” on page 93 shows bracket dimensions and mounting configurations for the B4 option.Options B1–B3 and B7–B9 are sturdy, epoxy/polyester-painted brackets designed for use with the traditional flange. The B1–B3 brackets have carbon steel bolts, while the B7–B9 brackets have stainless steel bolts. The BA and BC brackets and bolts are stainless steel. The B1/B7/BA and B3/B9/BC style brackets support 2-inch pipe-mount installations, and the B2/B8 style brackets support panel mounting.NoteMost transmitters are calibrated in the horizontal position. Mounting the transmitter in any other position will shift the zero point to the equivalent amount of liquid head caused by the varied mounting position. To reset zero point, refer to “Sensor Trim” on page 53.Position the antenna such that it is vertical, typically straight up (antenna may be pointed down as well.)
32Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012InstallationFlange BoltsThe 3051 can be shipped with a Coplanar flange or a Traditional flange installed with four 1.75-inch flange bolts. Mounting bolts and bolting configurations for the Coplanar and Traditional flanges can be found on page 2-6, 7. Stainless steel bolts supplied by Emerson Process Management are coated with a lubricant to ease installation. Carbon steel bolts do not require lubrication. No additional lubricant should be applied when installing either type of bolt. Bolts supplied by Emerson Process Management are identified by their head markings:Bolt InstallationOnly use bolts supplied with the Rosemount 3051 or sold by Emerson Process Management as spare parts. When installing the transmitter to one of the optional mounting brackets, torque the bolts to 125 in-lb. (0,9 N-m). Use the following bolt installation procedure:1. Finger-tighten the bolts.2. Torque the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossing pattern.3. Torque the bolts to the final torque value using the same crossing pattern.Torque values for the flange and manifold adapter bolts are as follows:Table 3-1. Bolt InstallationTorque ValuesBolt Material Initial Torque Value Final Torque ValueCS-ASTM-A445 Standard 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 650 in.-lb (73 N-m)316 SST—Option L4 150 in.-lb (17 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m)ASTM-A-193-B7M—Option L5 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 650 in.-lb (73 N-m)Alloy K-500—Option L6 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 650 in.-lb (73 N-m)ASTM-A-453-660—Option L7 150 in.-lb (17 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m)ASTM-A-193-B8M—Option L8 150 in.-lb (17 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m)Carbon Steel (CS) Head MarkingsB7M316 B8M F593_Stainless Steel (SST) Head Markings* The last digit in the F593_ head marking may be any letter between A and M.F593_KM660 CL AAlloy K-500 Head Marking
33Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012InstallationImpulse PipingThe piping between the process and the transmitter must accurately transfer the pressure to obtain accurate measurements. There are five possible sources of error: leaks, friction loss (particularly if purging is used), trapped gas in a liquid line, liquid in a gas line, and density variations between the legs.The best location for the transmitter in relation to the process pipe depends on the process itself. Use the following guidelines to determine transmitter location and placement of impulse piping:Keep impulse piping as short as possible.For liquid service, slope the impulse piping at least 1 inch per foot (8 cm per m) upward from the transmitter toward the process connection.For gas service, slope the impulse piping at least 1 inch per foot (8 cm per m) downward from the transmitter toward the process connection.Avoid high points in liquid lines and low points in gas lines.Make sure both impulse legs are the same temperature.Use impulse piping large enough to avoid friction effects and blockage.Vent all gas from liquid piping legs.When using a sealing fluid, fill both piping legs to the same level.When purging, make the purge connection close to the process taps and purge through equal lengths of the same size pipe. Avoid purging through the transmitter.Keep corrosive or hot (above 250 °F [121 °C]) process material out of direct contact with the SuperModule and flanges.Prevent sediment deposits in the impulse piping.Keep the liquid head balanced on both legs of the impulse piping.Avoid conditions that might allow process fluid to freeze within the process flange.
34Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012InstallationMounting RequirementsRefer to Figure 3.4.2 for examples of the following mounting configurations:Liquid Flow MeasurementPlace taps to the side of the line to prevent sediment deposits on the process isolators.Mount the transmitter beside or below the taps so gases vent into the process line.Mount drain/vent valve upward to allow gases to vent.Gas Flow MeasurementPlace taps in the top or side of the line.Mount the transmitter beside or above the taps so to drain liquid into the process line.Steam Flow MeasurementPlace taps to the side of the line.Mount the transmitter below the taps to ensure that impulse piping will remain filled with condensate.Fill impulse lines with water to prevent steam from contacting the transmitter directly and to ensure accurate measurement start-up.NoteFor steam or other elevated temperature services, it is important that temperatures at the Coplanar process flanges must not exceed 250 °F (121 °C) for transmitters with silicone fill, or 185 °F (85 °C) for inert fill. For vacuum service, these temperature limits are reduced to 220 °F (104 °C) for silicone fill and 160 °F (71 °C) for inert fill. 3.4.2 Process Connections3051 Wireless transmitter flange process connection size is 1/4–18 NPT. Flange adapters with 1/2–14 NPT connections are available as the D2 option. Use your plant-approved lubricant or sealant when making the process connections. The process connections on the transmitter flange are on 21/8-inch (54 mm) centers to allow direct mounting to a three-valve or five-valve manifold. Rotate one or both of the flange adapters to attain connection centers of 2 inches (51 mm), 21/8inches (54 mm), or 21/4inches (57 mm).Install and tighten all four flange bolts before applying pressure to avoid leakage. When properly installed, the flange bolts will protrude through the top of the sensor module housing. Do not attempt to loosen or remove the flange bolts while the transmitter is in service.To install adapters to a Coplanar flange, perform the following procedure:1. Remove the flange bolts.2. Leaving the flange in place, move the adapters into position with the O-ring installed.3. Clamp the adapters and the Coplanar flange to the transmitter module using the longer of the bolts supplied.4. Tighten the bolts. Refer to “Flange Bolts” on page 32 for torque specifications.
35Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012InstallationNotePTFE O-rings should be replaced if the flange adapter is removed.Whenever you remove flanges or adapters, visually inspect the Teflon® O-rings. Replace them if there are any signs of damage, such as nicks or cuts. If you replace the O-rings, re-torque the flange bolts after installation to compensate for cold flow. Refer to the process sensor body reassembly procedure in Section 6: Troubleshooting on page 67.Failure to install proper flange adapter o-rings may cause process leaks, which can result in death or serious injury. The two flange adapters are distinguished by unique o-ring grooves. Only use the o-ring that is designed for its specific flange adapter, as shown below.ROSEMOUNT 3051S / 3051 / 2051 / 3001 / 3095 / 2024ROSEMOUNT 1151Flange AdapterO-ringFlange AdapterO-ringPTFE BasedElastomerPTFEElastomer
36Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012Installation3.4.3 Consider Housing RotationThe housing can be rotated to improve field access to wiring or to better view the optional LCD display. Perform the following procedure:Figure 3-3. Housing rotationA. Housing rotation screw (5/64-inch hex wrench required)1. Loosen the housing rotation set screw.2. Turn the housing up to 180 degrees to the left or right of its original (as shipped) position. NoteDo not rotate the housing more than 180 degrees without first performing a disassembly procedure (see “Removing from Service” on page 72). Over-rotation may sever the electrical connection between the sensor module and the feature board.3. Retighten the housing rotation set screw.In addition to housing rotation, the optional LCD display can be rotated in 90-degree increments by squeezing the two tabs, pulling out, rotating and snapping back into place.NoteIf LCD pins are inadvertently removed from the interface board, carefully re-insert the pins before snapping the LCD display back into place.3.4.4 Grounding Transmitter CaseAlways ground the transmitter case in accordance with national and local electrical codes. The most effective transmitter case grounding method is a direct connection to earth ground with minimal impedance. Methods for grounding the transmitter case include:External Ground Assembly: This assembly is included with the optional transient protection terminal block (Option Code T1), and it is included with various hazardous location certifications. The External Ground Assembly can also be ordered with the transmitter (Option Code V5), or as a spare part.A
37Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012Installation3.4.5 Power Module InstallationFigure 3-4. Power Module A. Housing rotation screw (5/64-inch hex wrench required)To make connections, perform the following procedure:1. Remove the housing cover on the Power Module compartment side. The Power Module supplies all power to the transmitter. 2. Connect Power Module 701PGNKF.3. Replace the Power Module cover and tighten to safety specification (metal to metal).3.4.6 Installing the LCD DisplayTransmitters ordered with the LCD display will be shipped with the display installed.NoteOnly use Rosemount Wireless LCD Part Number: 00753-9004-0002NoteAn LCD from a wired device will not function in a wireless device.In addition to housing rotation, the optional LCD display can be rotated in 90-degree increments by squeezing the two tabs, pulling out, rotating and snapping back into place.If LCD pins are inadvertently removed from the interface board, carefully re-insert the pins before snapping the LCD display back into place.Use the following procedure and Figure 3-5 to install the LCD display:A
38Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012Installation1. Remove the back cover and Power Module.2. Remove the transmitter cover opposite the field terminal side. Do not remove the instrument covers in explosive environments when the circuit is live.3. Engage the four-pin connector into the LCD display and snap into place.Note the following LCD temperature limits:Operating:–40 to 175 °F (–40 to 80 °C)Storage:–40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C)Figure 3-5. Optional LCD Display3.5 Rosemount 304, 305 and 306 Integral ManifoldsThe Rosemount 305 is available in two designs: Traditional and Coplanar. The traditional 305 Integral Manifold can be mounted to most primary elements with mounting adapters in the market today. The Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold is used with In-line transmitters to provide block-and-bleed valve capabilities of up to 10000 psi (690 bar). The Rosemount 304 comes in two basic styles: traditional (flange x flange and flange x pipe) and wafer. The 304 traditional manifold comes in 2, 3, and 5-valve configurations. The 304 wafer manifold comes in 3 and 5 valve configurations.
39Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012InstallationFigure 3-6. Integral Manifold Designs3.5.1 Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold Installation ProcedureTo install a 305 Integral Manifold to a 3051 Wireless transmitter:1. Inspect the Teflon sensor module O-rings. If the O-rings are undamaged, reusing them is recommended. If the O-rings are damaged (if they have nicks or cuts, for example), replace them with new O-rings.ImportantIf replacing the O-rings, take care not to scratch or deface the O-ring grooves or the surface of the isolating diaphragm while you remove the damaged O-rings.2. Install the Integral Manifold on the sensor module. Use the four 2.25-in. manifold bolts for alignment. Finger tighten the bolts, then tighten the bolts incrementally in a cross pattern to final torque value. See “Flange Bolts” on page 32 for complete bolt installation information and torque values. When fully tightened, the bolts should extend through the top of the module housing.3. If the Teflon sensor module O-rings have been replaced, the flange bolts should be re-tightened after installation to compensate for cold flow of the O-rings.4. If applicable, install flange adapters on the process end of the manifold using the 1.75-in. flange bolts supplied with the transmitter.NoteAlways perform a zero trim on the transmitter/manifold assembly after installation to eliminate mounting effects. See Section 5: Operation and Maintenance, “Zero Trim” on page 53.3.5.2 Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold Installation ProcedureThe 306 Manifold is for use only with a 3051T Wireless In-line transmitter.Assemble the 306 Manifold to the 3051T Wireless In-line transmitter with a thread sealant.
40Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012Installation1. Place transmitter into holding fixture.2. Apply appropriate thread paste or tape to threaded instrument end of the manifold.3. Count total threads on the manifold before starting assembly.4. Start turning the manifold by hand into the process connection on the transmitter.NoteIf using thread tape, be sure the thread tape does no strip when the manifold assembly is started.5. Wrench tighten manifold into process connection. (Note: Minimum toque value is 425 in-lbs)6. Count how many threads are still showing. (Note: Minimum engagement is 3 revolutions)7. Subtract the number of threads showing (after tightening) from the total threads to calculate the revolutions engaged. Further tighten until a minimum of 3 rotations is achieved.8. For block and bleed manifold, verify the bleed screw is installed and tightened. For two-valve manifold, verify the vent plug is installed and tightened.9. Leak-check assembly to maximum pressure range of transmitter.3.5.3 Rosemount 304 Conventional Manifold Installation ProcedureTo install a 304 Conventional Manifold to a 3051 Wireless transmitter:1. Align the Conventional Manifold with the transmitter flange. Use the four manifold bolts for alignment.2. Finger tighten the bolts, then tighten the bolts incrementally in a cross pattern to final torque value. See “Flange Bolts” on page 2-6 for complete bolt installation information and torque values. When fully tightened, the bolts should extend through the top of the module housing.3. If applicable, install flange adapters on the process end of the manifold using the 1.75-in. flange bolts supplied with the transmitter.3.5.4 Manifold OperationImproper installation or operation of manifolds may result in process leaks, which may cause death or serious injury.Always perform a zero trim on the transmitter/manifold assembly after installation to eliminate any shift due to mounting effects. See Section 5: Operation and Maintenance, “Sensor Trim Overview” on page 52.Three and five-valve configurations shown:
41Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012InstallationDrain/VentValveDrain/Vent Valve Equalize(closed)ProcessIsolate(open)Isolate(open)HLIn normal operation the two block valves between the process and instrument ports will be open and the equalizing valve will be closed.Drain/Vent Valve Equalize(closed)ProcessIsolate(closed)Isolate(open)HL1. To zero the 3051, close the block valve to the low pressure (downstream) side of the transmitter first.Drain/VentValveDrain/VentValveDrain/Vent Valve Equalize(open)ProcessIsolate(closed)Isolate(open)HL2. Open the center (equalize) valve to equalize the pressure on both sides of the transmitter. The manifold valves are now in the proper configuration for zeroing the transmitter. Drain/VentValveDrain/Vent Valve Equalize(closed)ProcessIsolate(closed)Isolate(open)HL3. After zeroing the transmitter, close the equalizing valve.Drain/VentValveDrain/Vent Valve Equalize(closed)ProcessIsolate(open)Isolate(open)HL4. Open the block valve on the low pressure side of the transmitter to return the transmitter to service.
42Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012InstallationFive-valve Natural Gas configurations shown:NoteDo not open the low side equalize valve before the high side equalize valve. Doing so will overpressure the transmitter.Test (Plugged)Test(Plugged)Equalize(closed)ProcessIsolate(open)Isolate(open)HLIn normal operation, the two block valves between the process and instrument ports will be open, and the equalizing valves will be closed. ProcessEqualize(closed)Drain VentTest (Plugged)Test(Plugged)Equalize(closed)ProcessIsolate(closed)Isolate(open)HL1. To zero the 3051, first close the block valve on the low pressure (downstream) side of the transmitter. ProcessEqualize(closed)Drain VentTest (Plugged)Test(Plugged)Equalize(closed)ProcessIsolate(closed)Isolate(open)HL2. Open the equalize valve on the high pressure (upstream) side of the transmitter. ProcessEqualize(open)Drain Vent(closed)
43Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012Installation3. Open the equalize valve on the low pressure (downstream) side of the transmitter. The manifold is now in the proper configuration for zeroing the transmitter. Test (Plugged)Test(Plugged)Equalize(open)ProcessIsolate(closed)Isolate(open)HLProcessEqualize(open)Drain Vent(closed)Test (Plugged)Test(Plugged)Equalize(closed)ProcessIsolate(closed)Isolate(open)HL4. After zeroing the transmitter, close the equalize valve on the low pressure (downstream) side of the transmitter. ProcessEqualize(open)Drain Vent(closed)5. Close the equalize valve on the high pressure (upstream) side.Test (Plugged)Test(Plugged)Equalize(closed)ProcessIsolate(closed)Isolate(open)HLProcessEqualize(closed)Drain Vent(closed)6. Finally, to return the transmitter to service, open the low side isolation valve.Test (Plugged)Test(Plugged)Equalize(closed)ProcessIsolate(open)Isolate(open)HLProcessEqualize(closed)Drain Vent(closed)
44Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012Installation
45Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012Installation
46Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 3: InstallationJune 2012Installation
Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 4: CommissioningJune 201247CommissioningSection 4 CommissioningSafety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 47Network Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 48Verify Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 484.1 Safety MessagesInstructions and procedures in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that potentially raises safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Please refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.4.1.1 Warnings ( )NoteThe Rosemount 3051 Wireless and all other wireless devices should be installed only after the Smart Wireless Gateway has been installed and is functioning properly.Wireless devices should also be powered up in order of proximity from the Smart Wireless Gateway, beginning with the closest device to the Smart Wireless GatewaySmart. This will result in a simpler and faster network installation.Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death orserious injury. Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation.Explosions could result in death or serious injury. Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices.Verify that the operating atmosphere of the transmitter is consistent with the appropriate hazardous locations certifications.Process leaks could result in death or serious injury. Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.Do not attempt to loosen or remove process connectors while the transmitter is in service.Electrical shock could cause death or serious injury. Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock.
48Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 4: CommissioningJune 2012Commissioning4.2 Network StatusIf the Rosemount 3051 Wireless was configured with the Network ID and Join Key and sufficient time for network polling has passed, the transmitter should be connected to the network. To verify connectivity, open the Smart Wireless Gateway’s integral web interface and navigate to the Explorer page. This page will display the transmitter’s HART tag, PV, SV, TV, QV, and Update Rate. A green status indicator means that the device is working properly. A red indicator means that there is a problem with either the device or its communication path. For more detail on a specific device, click on the tag name.4.3 Verify OperationOperation can be verified in three locations, at the device via the Local Display, using the Field Communicator, or at the Smart Wireless Gateway’s integrated web interface.Local DisplayThe LCD will display the PV value at the same rate as the configured update rate, but no faster than once every 60 seconds. Press the Diagnostic button to display the TAG, Device ID, Network ID, Network Join Status and Device Status screens.For Device Status screens, see “LCD Screen Messages” on page 57.
49Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 4: CommissioningJune 2012CommissioningFigure 4-1. Diagnostic Screen SequenceFigure 4-2. Network Join Status ScreensField CommunicatorTo verify device operation using a HART Field Communicator, a 3051 Wireless DD is required. For connecting with a Field Communicator, refer to Figure 2-1 on page 11.Smart Wireless GatewayTo verify device operation using the Smart Wireless Gateway’s integrated web interface, navigate to the Explorer page. This page will show whether the device has joined the network and if it is communicating properly.Tag Device ID Network IDNetwork Join Status Device StatusSearching for Network Joining NetworkConnected with Limited Bandwidth Connected Function Key Sequence Menu ItemsCommunications 3, 3 Join Status, Wireless Mode, Join Mode, Number of Available Neighbors, Number of Advertisements Heard, Number of Join Attempts.A b c d e f g hi d - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8n e t w k 13 0 5 I Dn e t w k O KS u p l y 7. 2 1v o l t sN E T w K S R C H N Gn e t w k N E G O Tn e t w kL I M - O Pn e t w k O K
50Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 4: CommissioningJune 2012Commissioning. A green status indicator means that the device is working properly. A red indicator means that there is a problem with either the device or its communication path. For more detail on a specific device, click on the tag name.TroubleshootingThe most common cause of incorrect operation is incorrect configuration of the Network ID and Join Key. The Network ID and Join Key in the device must match that of the Smart Wireless Gateway. The Network ID and Join Key may be obtained from the Smart Wireless Gateway on the Setup>Network>Settings page of the web interface.
51Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceSection 5 Operation and MaintenanceOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 51Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 51LCD Screen Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 575.1 OverviewThis section contains information on commissioning and operating 3051 Wireless Pressure Transm itters. Field Communicator and AMS instructions are given to perform configuration functions. For convenience, Field Communicator fast key sequences are labeled “Fast Keys” for each software function below the appropriate headings.5.2 CalibrationCalibrating a 3051 Wireless transmitter may include the following procedures:Sensor Trim: Adjusts the position of the factory sensor characterization curve to optimize performance over a specified pressure range, or to adjust for mounting effects.The 3051 sensor module uses a microprocessor that contains information about the sensor’s specific characteristics in response to pressure and temperature inputs. A smart transmitter compensates for these sensor variations. The process of generating the sensor performance profile is called factory sensor characterization. Sensor trimming requires an accurate pressure input and adds additional compensation that adjusts the position of the factory sensor characterization curve to optimize performance over a specific pressure range.NoteSensor trimming adjusts the position of the factory sensor characterization curve. It is possible to degrade performance of the transmitter if the trim is done improperly or with inaccurate equipment.
52Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceTable 5-1. Recommended Calibration TasksNote:A Field Communicator or AMS is required for all sensor and output trim procedures.Rosemount 3051C Range 4 and Range 5 transmitters require a special calibration procedure when used in differential pressure applications under high static line pressure.5.2.1 Sensor Trim OverviewTrim the sensor using either sensor or zero trim functions. Trim functions vary in complexity and are application-dependent. Both trim functions alter the transmitter’s interpretation of the input signal.Zero trim is a single-point offset adjustment. It is useful for compensating for mounting position effects and is most effective when performed with the transmitter installed in its final mounting position. Since this correction maintains the slope of the characterization curve, it should not be used in place of a sensor trim over the full sensor range.When performing a zero trim, ensure that the equalizing valve is open and all wet legs are filled to the correct levels.NoteDo not perform a zero trim on 3051 Wireless absolute pressure transmitters. Zero trim is zero based, and absolute pressure transmitters reference absolute zero. To correct mounting position effects on a 3051 Wireless absolute pressure transmitter, perform a low trim within the sensor trim function. The low trim function provides an offset correction similar to the zero trim function, but it does not require zero-based input.Transmitter Bench Calibration Tasks Field Calibration Tasks3051CD3051CG3051L3051TG, Range 1-41. Set output configuration parameters:a. Set the range points.b. Set the output units.c. Set the output type.d. Set the damping value.2. Optional: Perform a sensor trim. (Accurate pressure source required.)1. Reconfigure parameters if necessary.2. Zero trim the transmitter to compensate for mounting effects or static pressure effects.3. Optional: Perform an analog output trim. (Accurate multimeter required)3051CA3051TA3051TG, Range 51. Set output configuration parameters:a. Set the range points.b. Set the output units.c. Set the output type.d. Set the damping value.2. Optional: Perform a sensor trim if equipment available (accurate absolute pressure source required), otherwise perform the low trim value section of the sensor trim procedure.1. Reconfigure parameters if necessary.2. Perform low trim value section of the sensor trim procedure to correct for mounting position effects.3. Optional: Perform an analog output trim (Accurate multimeter required)
53Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceSensor trim is a two-point sensor calibration where two end-point pressures are applied, and all output is linearized between them. Always adjust the low trim value first to establish the correct offset. Adjustment of the high trim value provides a slope correction to the characterization curve based on the low trim value. The trim values allow you to optimize performance over your specified measuring range at the calibration temperature.During a trim operation, the 3051 Wireless is placed in high power refresh mode, which provides frequent pressure measurement updates and allows the configured damping to take effect. This behavior allows for more accurate calibration of the device. When the device is in high power refresh mode, the battery power supply will be depleted more rapidly.5.2.2 Zero TrimNoteThe transmitter must be within three percent of true zero (zero-based) in order to calibrate with zero trim function.After properly venting the transmitter, calibrate the transmitter with the zero trim function:1. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.2. Select 1: Guided Setup.3. Select 3: Zero Trim and follow the on-screen instruction to complete the zero trim adjustment.5.2.3 Sensor TrimNoteUse a pressure input source that is at least three times more accurate than the transmitter, and allow the input pressure to stabilize for ten seconds before entering any values.To calibrate the transmitter using the sensor trim function:1. Assemble and power the entire calibration system including the 3051, Field Communicator/AMS, power supply, pressure input source, and readout device.2. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.3. Select 4: Routine Maintenance.4. Select 1: Sensor Calibration.5. Select 4: Lower Sensor Trim. The lower sensor trim value should be the sensor trim point that is closest to zero.6. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the adjustment of the lower value.7. Repeat the procedure for the upper value. Select 5: Upper Sensor Trim and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the adjustment of the upper value.Fast Keys 2, 1, 3Fast Keys 3, 4, 1
54Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceNoteSelect pressure input values so that lower and upper values are equal to or outside the Lower and Upper Operating points. Do not attempt to obtain reverse output by reversing the high and low points. The transmitter allows approximately five percent deviation. 5.2.4 Recall Factory Trim—Sensor TrimThe Recall Factory Trim—Sensor Trim command allows the restoration of the as-shipped factory settings of the sensor trim. This command can be useful for recovering from an inadvertent zero trim of an absolute pressure unit or inaccurate pressure source.To restore sensor trim to as-shipped factory settings:1. From the Home screen, Select 3: Service Tools.2. Select 4: Routine Maintenance.3. Select 1: Sensor Calibration.4. Select 6: Recall Factory Trim.5.2.5 Line Pressure Effect (Range 2 and Range 3)The following specifications show the static pressure effect for the Rosemount 3051 Range 2 and Range 3 pressure transmitters used in differential pressure applications where line pressure exceeds 2000 psi (138 bar). Zero Effect± 0.1% of the upper range limit plus an additional ± 0.1% of upper range limit error for each 1000 psi (69 bar) of line pressure above 2000 psi (138 bar).Example: Line pressure is 3000 psi (207 bar) for Ultra performance transmitter. Zero effect error calculation:± {0.05 + 0.1 x [3 kpsi - 2 kpsi]} = ± 0.15% of the upper range limitSpan EffectRefer to “Line Pressure Effect” on page 82. 5.2.6 Compensating for Line Pressure (Range 4 and Range 5)The Rosemount 3051 Wireless Range 4 and 5 pressure transmitters require a special calibration procedure when used in differential pressure applications. The purpose of this procedure is to optimize transmitter performance by reducing the effect of static line pressure in these applications. The 3051 Wireless differential pressure transmitters (Ranges 1, 2, and 3) do not require this procedure because optimization occurs in the sensor.Fast Keys 3, 4, 1, 6
55Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceApplying high static pressure to the 3051 Wireless Range 4 and Range 5 pressure transmitters causes a systematic shift in the output. This shift is linear with static pressure; correct it by performing the “Sensor Trim” procedure on page 53.The following specifications show the static pressure effect for the 3051 Wireless Range 4 and Range 5 transmitters used in differential pressure applications:Zero Effect:± 0.1% of the upper range limit per 1000 psi (69 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 2000 psi (0 to 138 bar)For line pressures above 2000 psi (138 bar), the zero effect error is ± 0.2% of the upper range limit plus an additional ± 0.2% of upper range limit error for each 1000 psi (69 bar) of line pressure above 2000 psi (138 bar).Example: Line pressure is 3000 psi (3 kpsi). Zero effect error calculation:± {0.2 + 0.2 x [3 kpsi - 2 kpsi]} = ± 0.4% of the upper range limitSpan Effect:Correctable to ±0.2% of reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 3626 psi (0 to 250 bar)The systematic span shift caused by the application of static line pressure is -1.00% of reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) for Range 4 transmitters, and -1.25% of reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) for Range 5 transmitters.Use the following example to compute corrected input values.ExampleA transmitter with model number 3051_CD4 will be used in a differential pressure application where the static line pressure is 1200 psi (83 bar). The transmitter output is ranged with 4 mA at 500 inH2O (1,2 bar) and 20 mA at 1500 inH2O (3,7 bar).To correct for systematic error caused by high static line pressure, first use the following formulas to determine corrected values for the low trim and high trim.
56Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceLT = LRV + S x (LRV) x P HT = URV + S x (URV) x P In this example: To calculate the low trim (LT) value: To calculate the high trim (HT) value: Complete a 3051 Wireless sensor trim and enter the corrected values for low trim (LT) and high trim (HT), refer to “Sensor Trim” on page 53.Enter the corrected input values for low trim and high trim through the Field Communicator keypad after you apply the nominal value of pressure as the transmitter input.NoteAfter sensor trimming 3051 Wireless Range 4 and 5 transmitters for high differential pressure applications, verify that the Lower and Upper Operating points are at nominal values using the Field Communicator.Where: LT = Corrected Low Trim ValueLRV = Lower Range ValueS = –(Span shift per specification)P = Static Line PressureWhere: HT = Corrected High Trim ValueURV = Upper Range ValueS = –(Span shift per specification)P = Static Line PressureURV = 1500 inH2O (3.74 bar)LRV = 500 inH2O (1.25 bar)P = 1200 psi (82.74 bar)S = ± 0.01/1000LT = 500 + (0.01/1000)(500)(1200)LT = 506 inH2O (1.26 bar)HT = 1500 + (0.01/1000)(1500)(1200)HT = 1518 inH2O (3.78 bar)
57Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and Maintenance5.3 LCD Screen Messages5.3.1 Startup Screen SequenceThe following screens will display when the Power Module is first connected to the Rosemount 3051 Wireless. All Segments On: used to visually determine if there are any bad segments on the LCDDevice Identification: used to determine Device Type.Device Information - Tag: user entered tag which is eight characters long - will not display if all characters are blankPV Screen - process pressureX X X X XX X X X x x xx x x x x x 3 0 5 1 W I r e l sA b c d e f g hP R E S S 5 8. 0 P S I
58Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceSV Screen - sensor temperature valueTV Screen - device temperature valueQV Screen - voltage reading at the power supply terminalsPercent Range Screen - percent range readingAlert Screen - at least one alert is present - this screen will not display if no alerts are presentS N S R 2 5. 0 0d e g c D E V 2 5. 2 5d e g cS u p l y 7. 2 1v o l t sP R C N T 7. 2 1R A N G Ea l e r t p r e s n t
59Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and Maintenance5.3.2 Diagnostic Button Screen SequenceThe following five screens will display when the device is operating properly and the Diagnostic Button has been pressed.Device Information - Tag: user entered tag which is eight characters long - will not display if all characters are blankDevice Identification: used to determine Device IDDiagnostic Button Screen 3: assuming the device has the correct join key, this ID tells the user what network the device can connect withDiagnostic Button Screen 4: the device has joined a network and has been fully configured and has multiple parentsA b c d e f g hi d - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8n e t w k 13 0 5 I Dn e t w k O K
60Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and Maintenance5.3.3 Network Diagnostic Status ScreensThese screens display the network status of the device. Only one will be shown during the startup sequence or diagnostic sequence.Diagnostic Button Screen 5: voltage reading at the power supply terminalsDiagnostic Button Screen 4.1: the device is attempting to start the radioDiagnostic Button Screen 4.2: the device has just restartedDiagnostic Button Screen 4.3: the device is starting to join the processS u p l y 7. 2 1v o l t sn e t w k u n k n w nn e t w k I N I Tn e t w k i d l e
61Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceDiagnostic Button Screen 4.4: the device is in a disconnected state and requires a “Force Join” command to join the networkDiagnostic Button Screen 4.5: the device is searching for the NetworkDiagnostic Button Screen 4.6: the device is attempting to join a networkDiagnostic Button Screen 4.7: the device is connected to the Network, but is in a “Quarantined” stateDiagnostic Button Screen 4.8: the device is joined and operational, but is running with limited bandwidth for sending periodic datan e t w k D I S C N TN E T w K S R C H N Gn e t w k N E G O Tn e t w k c o n e c tn e t w kL I M - O P
62Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceDiagnostic Button Screen 4.9: the device has joined a network and has been fully configured and has multiple parentsn e t w k O K
63Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and Maintenance5.3.4 Device Diagnostic ScreensThe following screens will show the device diagnostics depending on the state of the device.Device Information - Status: there is a critical error which may prevent the device from operating correctly. Check additional status screens for more information.PV Screen - process pressure value SV Screen - sensor temperature valueTV Screen - device temperature value D E V f A i l u rP R E S S 5 8. 0 P S IS N S R 2 5. 0 0d e g c D E V 2 5. 2 5d e g c
64Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceQV Screen - voltage reading at the power supply terminalsPercent Range Screen - percent range readingAlert Screen - at least one alert is present - this screen will not display if no alerts are presentDiagnostic Button Screen 1 - Tag: user entered tag which is eight characters long - will not display if all characters are blankDiagnostic Button Screen 2: the device’s identifier that is used to make up the HART long address - the Smart Wireless Gateway may use this to help identify devices if no unique user tag is availableS u p l y 7. 2 1v o l t sP R C N T 7. 2 1R A N G Ea l e r t p r e s n tA b c d e f g hi d - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
65Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceDiagnostic Button Screen 7.1: the terminal voltage has dropped below level of operating limit. Replace the Power Module (Part Number: 701PGNKF)Diagnostic Button Screen 7.2: the terminal voltage is below the recommended operating range - if this is a battery operated device, the Power Module should be replaced - for line powered devices, the supply voltage should be increasedDiagnostic Button Screen 8: the device may not be able to communicate with the radio or the radio has an internal error. In this state the device may still be operational and publishing HART dataDiagnostic Button Screen 9.1: configuration of the transmitter is invalid such that critical operation of the device may be affected - check the extended configuration status to identify which configuration item(s) need to be correcteds u p l y f a i l u rs u p l y l o wr a d i o f a i l u rc o n f g f a i l u r
66Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: Operation and MaintenanceJune 2012Operation and MaintenanceNoteUse the Rosemount Wireless LCD Part Number: 00753-9004-0002.Diagnostic Button Screen 9.2: configuration of the transmitter is invalid such that non-critical operation of the device may be affected - check the extended configuration status to identify which configuration item(s) need to be correctedDiagnostic Button Screen 10.1: a sensor attached to the transmitter has failed, and valid readings from that sensor are no longer possible - check the sensor and sensor wiring connections - check additional status for more detailed information of the failure sourceDiagnostic Button Screen 10.2: a sensor attached to the transmitter is degraded, readings from that sensor may not be within accuracy specifications - check the process, and sensor wiring connections - check additional status for more detailed information of the warning sourcec o n f g w a r ns n s r f a i l u rs n s r w a r n
Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 6: TroubleshootingJune 201267TroubleshootingSection 6 Troubleshooting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 67Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 67Disassembly Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 72Reassembly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 756.1 OverviewTable 6-2 provides summarized maintenance and troubleshooting suggestions for the most common operating problems. If you suspect malfunction despite the absence of any diagnostic messages on the Field Communicator display, consider using Section X.X on page XX to identify any potential problem6.2 Safety MessagesProcedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
68Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 6: TroubleshootingJune 2012Troubleshooting6.2.1 Warnings ( )Table 6-1. Rosemount 3051 Wireless Device Status InformationExplosions could result in death or serious injury: Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review the approvals section of the 3051 reference manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation.Before connecting a HART-based communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices.This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions.This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.This device must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 8 in. (20 cm) from all persons.The Power Module may be replaced in a hazardous area. The Power Module has surface resistivity greater than one gigaohm and must be properly installed in the wireless device enclosure. Care must be taken during transportation to and from the point of installation to prevent a potential electrostatic charging hazard.Polymer enclosure has surface resistivity greater than one gigaohm. Care must be taken during transportation to and from the point of installation to prevent a potential electrostatic charging hazard.Process leaks may cause harm or result in death.To avoid process leaks, only use the o-ring designed to seal with the corresponding flange adapter. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.Avoid contact with the leads and the terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock.Device Status Description Recommended ActionElectronics Failure An electronics error that could impact the device measement reading has occurred.1. Reset the device2. Reconfirm all configuration items in the device3. If the condition persists, replace the electronicsRadio Failure The wireless radio has detected a failure or stopped communicating.1. Reset the device2. If the condition persists, replace the electronicsSupply Voltage Failure The supply voltage is too low for the device to function properly.1. Replace the Power Module
69Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: TroubleshootingJune 2012TroubleshootingElectronics Warning The device has detected an electronics error that does not currently impact the device measurement reading.1. Reset the device2. Reconfirm all configuration items in the device3. If the condition persists, replace the electronicsPressure has Exceeded Limits The sensor has exceeded the maximum measurement range.1. Check process for possible saturation condition2. Verify that the appropriate sensor was chosen for the application3. Reconfirm sensor configuration4. Reset the device5. Replace the sensorElectronics Temperature has Exceeded LimitsThe electronics temperature has exceeded the transmitter's maximum range.1. Verify environmental temperature is within the transmitter’s range2. Remote mount the transmitter away from process and environmental conditions3. Reset the device4. If the condition persists, replace the electronicsSupply Voltage Low The supply voltage is low and may soon affect broadcast updates.1. Replace the Power ModuleDatabase Memory Warning The device has failed to write to the database memory. Any data written during this time may have been lost.1. Reset the device2. Reconfirm all configuration items in the device3. If logging dynamic data not needed, this advisory can be safely ignored4. If the condition persists, replace the electronicsConfiguration Error The device has detected a configuration error based on a change to the device.1. Click on details for more information2. Correct the parameter that has a configuration error3. Reset the device4. If the condition persists, replace the electronicsHI HI Alarm The primary variable has surpassed the user defined limit.1. Verify that the process variable is within user specified limits2. Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit3. If not needed, disable this alertDevice Status Description Recommended Action
70Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 6: TroubleshootingJune 2012TroubleshootingHI Alarm The primary variable has surpassed the user defined limit.1. Verify that the process variable is within user specified limits2. Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit3. If not needed, disable this alertLO Alarm The primary variable has surpassed the user defined limit.1. Verify that the process variable is within user specified limits2. Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit3. If not needed, disable this alertLO LO Alarm The primary variable has surpassed the user defined limit.1. Verify that the process variable is within user specified limits2. Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit3. If not needed, disable this alertButton Stuck A buttons on the Electronics Board is detected as stuck in the active position.1. Check the buttons for obstructions2. Reset the device3. If the condition persists, replace the electronicsSimulation Active The device is in simulation mode and may not be reporting actual information.1. Verify that simulation is no longer required2. Disable Simulation mode in Service Tools3. Reset the deviceDevice Status Description Recommended Action
71Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: TroubleshootingJune 2012TroubleshootingTable 6-2. Rosemount 3051 Wireless TroubleshootingTable 6-3. Wireless Network TroubleshootingSymptom Recommended ActionsTransmitter will not respond to changes in applied pressure Check test equipmentCheck impulse piping or manifold for blockageVerify applied pressure is within sensor limitsDigital Pressure Variable reading is low or high Check test equipment (verify accuracy)Check impulse piping for blockage or low fill in wet legVerify transmitter is calibrated properlyVerify pressure calculations for applicationDigital Pressure Variable reading is erratic Check application for faulty equipment in pressure lineVerify transmitter is not reacting directly to equipment turning on/offLCD display is not functioning Reseat the LCD according to “Installing the LCD Display” on page 37Verify that the LCD display is a wireless LCD Meter. An LCD from a wired device will not function in a wireless device. Rosemount part number: 00753-9004-0002Verify that the LCD display mode is not disabled.Symptom Recommended ActionsDevice not joining the network Verify network ID and join keyWait longer (30 min.)Enable High Speed Operation on Smart Wireless GatewayCheck Power ModuleVerify device is within range of at least one other deviceVerify network is in active network advertisePower Cycle device to try againVerify device is configured to join. Send the “Force Join” command to the deviceSee troubleshooting section of Smart Wireless Gateway for more informationShort battery life Check that “Power Always On” mode is offVerify device is not installed in extreme temperaturesVerfiy that device is not a network pinch pointCheck for excessive network rejoins due to poor connectivityLimited Bandwidth Error Reduce the Update Rate on transmitterIncrease communication paths by adding more wireless pointsCheck that device has been online for at least an hourCheck that device is not routing through a “limited” routing nodeCreate a new network with an additional Smart Wireless Gateway
72Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 6: TroubleshootingJune 2012Troubleshooting6.3 Disassembly Procedures6.3.1 Removing from ServiceFollow these steps:1. Follow all plant safety rules and procedures.2. Isolate and vent the process from the transmitter before removing the transmitter from service.3. Remove the transmitter from the process connection.a. The Rosemount 3051C Wireless transmitter is attached to the process connection by four bolts and two cap screws. Remove the bolts and screws and separate the transmitter from the process connection. Leave the process connection in place and ready for re-installation. Reference Figure X-X on page 43 for coplanar flange.b. The Rosemount 3051T Wireless transmitter is attached to the process by a single hex nut process connection. Loosen the hex nut to separate the transmitter from the process. Do not wrench on neck of transmitter. See warning in "Inline process connection' on page XX.4. Do not scratch, puncture, or depress the isolating diaphragms.5. Clean isolating diaphragms with a soft rag and a mild cleaning solution, and rinse with clear water.6. Whenever you remove the process flange or flange adapters, visually inspect the PTFE o-rings. Replace the o-rings if they show any signs of damage, such as nicks or cuts. Undamaged o-rings may be reused.
73Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: TroubleshootingJune 2012Troubleshooting6.3.2 Removing the electronics boardThe Wireless electronics board is located in the electronics compartment. To remove the assembly, perform the following procedure. 1. Remove the housing cover opposite the field terminal side.2. Remove the LCD Display, if applicable. To do this, hold in the two clips and pull outward.NoteThe electronics board is electrostatically sensitive; observe handling precautions for static-sensitive components.3. Loosen the two small screws located on the assembly.4. Replace the LCD Display. This will help in removing the assembly.NoteIf an LCD is installed, use caution as there is an electronic pin connector that interfaces between the LCD and electronics board.5. Pull out the assembly to expose and locate the sensor module connector.6. Grasp the sensor module connector, squeeze the clips and pull upwards (avoid pulling wires).
74Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 6: TroubleshootingJune 2012TroubleshootingFigure 6-1. Sensor module connector view6.3.3 Removing the sensor from the housingNoteTo prevent damage to the senser module cable, disconnect it from the PlantWeb assembly before you remove the senser module from the housing.1. Loosen the housing rotation screw with a 3/32-inch hex wrench, then rotate back one full turn.2. Unscrew the housing from the senser module.Wireless Housing
75Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 5: TroubleshootingJune 2012Troubleshooting6.4 Reassembly procedures6.5 Reassembly procedures1. Inspect all cover and housing (non-process wetted) O-rings and replace if necessary. Lightly grease with silicone lubricant to ensure a good seal.2. Carefully tuck the cable connector completely inside the internal black cap. To do so, turn the black cap and cable counterclockwise one rotation to tighten the cable.3. Lower the electronics housing onto the module. Guide the internal black cap and cable on the sensor module through the housing and into the external black cap.4. Turn the module clockwise into the housing.ImportantMake sure the sensor ribbon cable and internal black cap remain completely free of the housing as you rotate it. Damage can occur to the cable if the internal black cap and ribbon cable become hung up and rotate with the housing.5. Thread the housing completely onto the sensor module. The housing must be no more than one full turn from flush with the sensor module to comply with explosion proof requirements.6. Tighten the housing rotation set screw using a 5/64-inch hex wrench.6.5.1 Attaching electronics board1. Remove the cable connector from its position inside of the internal black cap and attach it to the electronics board.2. Using the two captive screws as handles, insert the electronics board into the housing. Make sure the power posts from the electronics housing properly engage the receptacles on the electronics board. Do not force. The electronics board should slide gently on the connections.3. Tighten the captive mounting screws.4. Replace the electronics housing cover. The transmitter covers must be engaged metal-to-metal to ensure a proper seal and to meet Explosion-Proof requirements.6.5.2 Reassembling the 3051C process flange1. Inspect the sensor module PTFE o-rings. Undamaged o-rings may be reused. Replace o-rings that show any signs of damage, such as nicks, cuts, or general wear.See “Safety Messages” on page 67 for complete warning
76Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AASection 6: TroubleshootingJune 2012TroubleshootingNoteIf you are replacing the o-rings, be careful not to scratch the o-ring grooves or the surface of the isolating diaphragm when removing the damaged o-rings.2. Install the process connection. Possible options include:a. Coplanar Process Flange:–Hold the process flange in place by installing the two alignment screws to finger tightness (screws are not pressure retaining). Do not overtighten as this will affect module-to-flange alignment.–Install the four 1.75-in. flange bolts by finger tightening them to the flange. b. Coplanar Process Flange with Flange Adapters:–Hold the process flange in place by installing the two alignment screws to finger tightness (screws are not pressure retaining). Do not overtighten as this will affect module-to-flange alignment.–Hold the flange adapters and adapter o-rings in place while installing (in the desired of the four possible process connection spacing configurations) using four 2.88-inch bolts to mount securely to the coplanar flange. For gage pressure configurations, use two 2.88-inch bolts and two 1.75-inch boltsc. Manifold:–Contact the manifold manufacturer for the appropriate bolts and procedures.3. Tighten the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossed pattern. See Table 6-4 on page 6-76 for appropriate torque values.4. Using same cross pattern, tighten bolts to final torque values seen in Table 6-4 on page 6-76.Table 6-4. Bolt installation torque valuesNoteIf you replaced the PTFE sensor module o-rings, re-torque the flange bolts after installation to compensate for cold flow.NoteFor Range 1 transmitters: after replacing o-rings and re-installing the process flange, expose the transmitter to a temperature of 185 °F (85 °C) for two hours. Then re-tighten the flange bolts in a cross pattern, and again expose the transmitter to a temperature of 185 °F (85 °C) for two hours before calibration.Bolt material Initial torque value Final torque valueCS-ASTM-A445 Standard 300 in-lb. (34 N-m) 650 in-lb. (73 N-m)316 SST—Option L4 150 in-lb. (17 N-m) 300 in-lb. (34 N-m)ASTM-A-19 B7M—Option L5 300 in-lb. (34 N-m) 650 in-lb. (73 N-m)ASTM-A-193 Class 2, Grade B8M—Option L8 150 in.-lb (17 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m)See “Safety Messages” on page 67 for complete warning
98Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataProduct CertificationsStandard StandardI1 ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust ★I2 INMETRO Intrinsic Safety ★I3 China Intrinsic Safety ★I4 TIIS Intrinsic Safety ★I5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ★I7 IECEx Intrinsic Safety ★Drinking Water ApprovalStandard StandardDW(11) NSF drinking water approval ★Bolting MaterialStandard StandardL4 Austenitic 316 SST Bolts ★L5 ASTM A 193, Grade B7M Bolts ★L6 Alloy K-500 Bolts ★Display and Interface OptionsStandard StandardM5 LCD Display ★Calibration CertificateStandard StandardQ4 Calibration Certificate ★QG Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate ★QP Calibration certification and tamper evident seal ★Material Traceability CertificationStandard StandardQ8 Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B ★Configuration ButtonsStandard StandardDZ Digital Zero Trim ★Software ConfigurationStandard StandardC1 Custom Software Configuration (Completed CDS 00806-0100-4001 required with order) ★Gage Pressure CalibrationStandard StandardC3 Gage Calibration (Model 3051CA4 only) ★Pressure TestingExpandedP1 Hydrostatic Testing with CertificateCleaning Process AreaExpandedP2 Cleaning for Special Service Table 1. 3051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
99Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataP3 Cleaning for <1 PPM Chlorine/FluorinePressure CalibrationExpandedP4 Calibrate at Line Pressure (Specify Q48 on order for corresponding certificate)High AccuracyStandard StandardP8(12) 0.04% Accuracy to 5:1 turndown (Range 2-4) ★Flange AdaptersStandard StandardDF(13) 1/2 -14 NPT flange adapter(s) ★D3 ¼–18 NPT Process Connections (No flange adapters)Vent/Drain ValvesExpandedD7 Coplanar Flange Without Drain/Vent PortsRC1/4 RC1/2 Process ConnectionExpandedD9(14) RC ¼ Flange with RC ½ Flange Adapter, CS - SSTMax Static Line PressureStandard StandardP9 4500 psig (310 bar) Static Pressure Limit (3051CD Ranges 2–5 only) ★Surface FinishStandard StandardQ16 Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals ★Toolkit Total System Performance ReportsStandard StandardQZ Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report ★Typical Model Number: 3051CD 2 A 2 2 A 1 A B4$13857 780(1)Wireless output (code X) available in absolute measurement type (Code A) with only range 1-4, 316L SST isolating diaphragm material (code 2), silicone fill fluid (code 1), and housing code (code P).(2)Wireless output (code X) available in draft range 0 with only 316L SST isolating diaphragm (code 2), silicone fill fluid (code 1), housing code (code P), process flange (code 0), glass-filled o-ring (code A), and bolting option (code L4).(3)Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.(4)Requires 0 code in Materials of Construction for Alternate Process Connection.(5)Not valid with optional code P9 for 4500 psi Static Pressure.(6)“Assemble-to” items are specified separately and require a completed model number.(7)Process Flange limited to Coplanar (codes 2, 3, 5, 7, 8) or Traditional (H2, H3, H7).(8)Not valid with optional code D9 for RC1/2 Adaptors.(9)Not valid for optional codes DF and D9 for Adaptors.(10)Panel mounting bolts are not supplied.(11)Not available with Alloy C-276 isolator (3 code), tantalum isolator (5 code), all Cast Alloy C-276 flanges, all plated CS flanges, all DIN flanges, all Level flanges, assemble-to manifolds (S5 and S6 codes), assemble-to seals (S1 and S2 codes), assemble-to primary elements (S3 and S4 codes), surface finish certification (Q16 code), and remote seal system report (QZ code).(12)Only available with Standard 3051. See specification section for more information.(13)Not valid with Alternate Process Connection options S3, S4, S5, and S6. Table 1. 3051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
100Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference Data(14)Not available with Alternate Process Connection; DIN Flanges and Level Flanges.
101Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataA.5.3 Rosemount 3051T In-Line Pressure TransmitterThis ordering table contains the following Rosemount 3051T configurations:See Options for more details on each configuration. Additional InformationDimensional Drawings: page 93Configuration Transmitter Output Code4-20 mA HART®-3051-Enhanced 3051(1)(1)The enhanced 4-20 mA HART device can be ordered with Transmitter Output option code A plus any of the following new option codes: DA0, M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7.AFOUNDATION™ fieldbus FProfibus W Table 2. 3051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.Model Transmitter Type3051T In-Line Pressure TransmitterPressure TypeStandard StandardGGage ★A(1) Absolute ★Pressure Range3051TG(2) 3051TAStandard Standard1-14.7 to 30 psi (-1.0 to 2.1 bar) 0 to 30 psia (0 to 2.1 bar) ★2-14.7 to 150 psi (-1.0 to 10.3 bar) 0 to 150 psia (0 to 10.3 bar) ★3-14.7 to 800 psi (-1.0 to 55 bar) 0 to 800 psia (0 to 55 bar) ★4-14.7 to 4000 psi (-1.0 to 276 bar) 0 to 4000 psia (0 to 276 bar) ★5-14.7 to 10000 psi (-1.0 to 689 bar) 0 to 10000 psia (0 to 689 bar) ★Transmitter OutputStandard StandardXWireless ★Process Connection StyleStandard Standard2B 1/2–14 NPT Female ★2C(3) G½ A DIN 16288 Male (Available in SST for Range 1–4 only) ★Expanded2F Coned and Threaded, Compatible with Autoclave Type F-250-C (Range 5 only)61 Non-threaded Instrument flange (Range 1-4 only)3051T In-LinePressure Transmitter
102Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataIsolating DiaphragmProcess Connection Wetted Parts MaterialStandard Standard2(4) 316L SST 316L SST ★3(4) Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 ★Sensor Fill FluidStandard Standard1Silicone ★Housing Material Conduit Entry SizeStandard StandardPEngineered polymer No conduit entries ★Wireless options (Requires option code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P)Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and ProtocolStandard StandardWA3 User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART ★PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality Standard StandardWP5 Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) ★Options (Include with selected model number)Integral AssemblyStandard StandardS5(5) Assemble to Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold ★Diaphragm Seal Assemblies Standard StandardS1(5) Assemble to one Rosemount 1199 seal ★Mounting Bracket(6)Standard StandardB4 Bracket for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting, All SST ★Product CertificationsStandard StandardI1 ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust ★I2 INMETRO Intrinsic Safety ★I3 China Intrinsic Safety ★I5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ★I7 IECEx Intrinsic Safety ★Drinking Water ApprovalStandard StandardDW(7) NSF drinking water approval ★Calibration CertificationStandard StandardQ4 Calibration Certificate ★QG Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate ★ Table 2. 3051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
103Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataQP Calibration Certification and tamper evident seal ★Material Traceability CertificationStandard StandardQ8 Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B ★Configuration ButtonsStandard StandardDZ Digital Zero Trim ★Display and Interface OptionsStandard StandardM5 LCD Display ★Wireless Sensor ModuleStandard StandardWSM Wireless SST Sensor Module ★Software ConfigurationStandard StandardC1(6) Custom Software Configuration (Completed CDS 00806-0100-4001 required with order) ★Pressure TestingExpandedP1 Hydrostatic Testing with CertificateCleaning Process Area(8)ExpandedP2 Cleaning for Special ServiceP3 Cleaning for <1 PPM Chlorine/FluorineHigh AccuracyStandard StandardP8(9) 0.04% Accuracy to 5:1 turndown (Range 2-4) ★Surface FinishStandard StandardQ16 Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals ★Toolkit Total System Performance ReportsStandard StandardQZ Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report ★Typical Model Number: 3051T G 5 F 2A 2 1 A B4(1)Wireless output (code X) available in absolute measurement type (Code A) with only range 1-4, 316L SST isolating diaphragm material (code 2), silicone fill fluid (code 1), and housing code (code P).(2)3051TG lower range limit varies with atmospheric pressure. (3)Wireless output (code X) only available in G 1/2 A DIN 16288 Male process connection (code 2C) with range 1-4, 316L SST isolating diaphragm (code 2), silcone fill fluid (code 1), and housing code (code P).(4)Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.(5)“Assemble-to” items are specified separately and require a completed model number.(6)Panel mounting bolts are not supplied. Table 2. 3051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
104Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference Data(7)Not available with Alloy C-276 isolator (3 code), tantalum isolator (5 code), all Cast Alloy C-276 flanges, all plated CS flanges, all DIN flanges, all Level flanges, assemble-to manifolds (S5 and S6 codes), assemble-to seals (S1 and S2 codes), assemble-to primary elements (S3 and S4 codes), surface finish certification (Q16 code), and remote seal system report (QZ code).(8)Not valid with Alternate Process Connection S5.(9)Only available with Standard 3051. See specification section for more information.
105Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataA.5.4 Rosemount 3051CF Flowmeter SeriesRosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.Model Product Description3051CFA Annubar FlowmeterMeasurement TypeStandard StandardDDifferential Pressure ★Fluid TypeStandard StandardLLiquid ★GGas ★SSteam ★Line SizeStandard Standard020 2-in. (50 mm) ★025 21/2-in. (63.5 mm) ★030 3-in. (80 mm) ★035 31/2-in. (89 mm) ★040 4-in. (100 mm) ★050 5-in. (125 mm) ★060 6-in. (150 mm) ★070 7-in. (175 mm) ★080 8-in. (200 mm) ★100 10-in. (250 mm) ★120 12-in. (300 mm) ★Expanded140 14-in. (350 mm)160 16-in. (400 mm)180 18-in. (450 mm)This ordering table contains the following Rosemount 3051CF configurations:See Options for more details on each configuration. Configuration Transmitter Output Code4-20 mA HART®-3051-Enhanced 3051(1)(1)The enhanced 4-20 mA HART device can be ordered with Transmitter Output option code A plus any of the following new option codes: DA0, M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7.AFOUNDATION™ fieldbus FProfibus W
106Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataExpanded200 20-in. (500 mm)240 24-in. (600 mm)300 30-in. (750 mm)360 36-in. (900 mm)420 42-in. (1066 mm)480 48-in. (1210 mm)600 60-in. (1520 mm)720 72-in. (1820 mm)780 78-in (1950 mm)840 84-in. (2100 mm)900 90-in. (2250 mm)960 96-in (2400 mm)Pipe I.D. Range Standard StandardCRange C from the Pipe I.D. table ★D Range D from the Pipe I.D. table ★ExpandedARange A from the Pipe I.D. tableBRange B from the Pipe I.D. tableERange E from the Pipe I.D. tableZNon-standard Pipe I.D. Range or Line Sizes greater than 12 inchesPipe Material / Mounting Assembly MaterialStandard StandardCCarbon steel (A105) ★S316 Stainless Steel ★0No Mounting (Customer Supplied) ★ExpandedGChrome-Moly Grade F-11NChrome-Moly Grade F-22JChrome-Moly Grade F-91Piping OrientationStandard StandardHHorizontal Piping ★DVertical Piping with Downwards Flow ★U Vertical Piping with Upwards Flow ★Annubar TypeStandard StandardPPak-Lok ★FFlanged with opposite side support ★ExpandedLFlange-LokGGear-Drive Flo-TapMManual Flo-Tap Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
107Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataSensor MaterialStandard StandardS316 Stainless Steel ★ExpandedHAlloy C-276Sensor SizeStandard Standard1Sensor size 1 — Line sizes 2-in. (50 mm) to 8-in. (200 mm) ★2Sensor size 2 — Line sizes 6-in. (150 mm) to 96-in. (2400 mm) ★3Sensor size 3 — Line sizes greater than 12-in. (300 mm) ★Mounting TypeStandard StandardT1 Compression or Threaded Connection ★A1 150# RF ANSI ★A3 300# RF ANSI ★A6 600# RF ANSI ★D1 DN PN16 Flange ★D3 DN PN40 Flange ★D6 DN PN100 Flange ★ExpandedA9(1) 900# RF ANSIAF(1) 1500# RF ANSIAT(1) 2500 # RF ANSIR1 150# RTJ FlangeR3 300# RTJ FlangeR6 600# RTJ FlangeR9(1) 900# RTJ FlangeRF(1) 1500# RTJ FlangeRT(1) 2500# RTJ FlangeOpposite Side Support or Packing GlandStandard Standard0No opposite side support or packing gland (Required for Pak-Lok and Flange-Lok models) ★Opposite Side Support – Required for Flanged ModelsCNPT Threaded Opposite Support Assembly – Extended Tip ★DWelded Opposite Support Assembly – Extended Tip ★ExpandedPacking Gland – Required for Flo-Tap ModelsPacking Gland Material Rod Material Packing MaterialJStainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Carbon Steel PTFEKStainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Stainless Steel PTFELStainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Carbon Steel GraphiteNStainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Stainless Steel GraphiteRAlloy C-276 Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Stainless Steel GraphiteIsolation Valve for Flo-Tap Models Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
108Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataStandard Standard0Not Applicable or Customer Supplied ★Expanded1Gate Valve, Carbon Steel2Gate Valve, Stainless Steel5Ball Valve, Carbon Steel6Ball Valve, Stainless SteelTemperature MeasurementStandard StandardTIntegral RTD – not available with Flanged model greater than class 600# ★0No Temperature Sensor ★ExpandedRRemote Thermowell and RTDTransmitter Connection PlatformStandard Standard3Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve Manifold– not available with Flanged model greater than class 600 ★5Direct -mount, 5-valve Manifold – not available with Flanged model greater than class 600 ★7Remote-mount NPT Connections (1/2-in. NPT) ★Expanded6Direct-mount, high temperature 5-valve Manifold – not available with Flanged model greater than class 6008Remote-mount SW Connections (1/2-in.)Differential Pressure RangeStandard Standard10 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar) ★20 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar) ★30 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar) ★Transmitter OutputStandard StandardXWireless ★Transmitter Housing Material Conduit Entry SizeStandard StandardPEngineered polymer No conduit entriesTransmitter Performance ClassStandard Standard11.6% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-yr. stability ★Wireless options (Requires option code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P)Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and ProtocolStandardWA3 User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHARTPlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality StandardWP5 Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
109Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataOptions (Include with selected model number)Pressure TestingExpandedP1(2) Hydrostatic Testing with CertificatePX(2) Extended Hydrostatic TestingSpecial CleaningExpandedP2 Cleaning for Special ServicesPA Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4)Material TestingExpandedV1 Dye Penetrant ExamMaterial ExaminationExpandedV2 Radiographic ExaminationFlow CalibrationExpandedW1 Flow Calibration (Average K)Special InspectionStandard StandardQC1 Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate ★QC7 Inspection & Performance Certificate ★Surface FinishStandard StandardRL Surface finish for Low Pipe Reynolds # in Gas & Steam ★RH Surface finish for High Pipe Reynolds # in Liquid ★Material Traceability CertificationStandard StandardQ8(3) Material Traceability Certification per EN 10474:2004 3.1 ★Code Conformance(4)ExpandedJ2 ANSI/ASME B31.1J3 ANSI/ASME B31.3Materials ConformanceExpandedJ5(5) NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156Country CertificationStandard StandardJ6 European Pressure Directive (PED) ★ExpandedJ1 Canadian RegistrationInstalled in Flanged Pipe Spool SectionExpandedH3 150# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and ScheduleH4 300# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and Schedule Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
110Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataH5 600# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and ScheduleInstrument Connections for Remote Mount OptionsStandard StandardG2 Needle Valves, Stainless Steel ★G6 OS&Y Gate Valve, Stainless Steel ★ExpandedG1 Needle Valves, Carbon SteelG3 Needle Valves, Alloy C-276G5 OS&Y Gate Valve, Carbon SteelG7 OS&Y Gate Valve, Alloy C-276Special ShipmentStandard StandardY1 Mounting Hardware Shipped Separately ★Special DimensionsExpandedVM Variable MountingVT Variable TipVS Variable length Spool SectionProduct CertificationsStandard StandardI1 ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust ★I2 INMETRO Intrinsic Safety ★I3 China Intrinsic Safety ★I5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ★I7 IECEx Intrinsic Safety ★Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring OptionsStandard StandardL2 Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring ★Display and Interface OptionsStandard StandardM5 LCD Display ★Transmitter Calibration CertificationStandard StandardQ4 Calibration Certificate for Transmitter ★Manifold for Remote Mount OptionStandard StandardF2 3-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel ★F6 5-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel ★ExpandedF1 3-Valve Manifold, Carbon SteelF3 3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276 F5 5-Valve Manifold, Carbon SteelF7 5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276Configuration ButtonsStandard StandardDZ Digital Zero Trim ★ Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
111Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataTypical Model Number: 3051CFA D L 060 D C H P S 2 T1 0 0 0 3 2 A A 1(1)Available in remote mount applications only.(2)Applies to assembled flowmeter only, mounting not tested.(3)Instrument Connections for Remote Mount Options and Isolation Valves for Flo-tap Models are not included in the Material Traceability Certification.(4)Not available with Transmitter Connection Platform 6.(5)Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments. Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
112Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataRosemount 3051CFC Compact Flowmeter Table 4. Rosemount 3051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.Model Product Description3051CFC Compact FlowmeterMeasurement TypeStandard StandardDDifferential Pressure ★Primary Element TechnologyStandard StandardCConditioning Orifice Plate ★POrifice Plate ★Material TypeStandard StandardS316 SST ★Line SizeStandard Standard005(1) 1/2-in. (15 mm) ★010(1) 1-in. (25 mm) ★015(1) 11/2-in. (40 mm) ★020 2-in. (50 mm) ★030 3-in. (80 mm) ★040 4-in. (100 mm) ★060 6-in. (150 mm) ★080 8-in. (200 mm) ★100 10-in. (250 mm) ★120 12-in. (300 mm) ★Primary Element StyleStandard StandardNSquare Edged ★Primary Element TypeStandard Standard040 0.40 Beta Ratio ★065(2) 0.65 Beta Ratio ★Temperature MeasurementStandard Standard0No Temperature Sensor ★ExpandedRRemote Thermowell and RTDTransmitter Connection PlatformStandard StandardAdditional InformationDimensional Drawings: 3
113Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference Data3Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve Manifold ★7Remote-mount, 1/4-in. NPT Connections ★Differential Pressure RangeStandard Standard10 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar) ★20 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar) ★30 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar) ★Transmitter OutputStandard StandardXWireless ★Transmitter Housing Material Conduit Entry SizeStandard StandardPEngineered polymer No conduit entries ★Transmitter Performance ClassStandard Standard1Up to ±1.75% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-year stability ★Wireless options (Requires option code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P)Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and ProtocolStandardWA3 User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHARTPlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality StandardWP5 Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)Options (Include with selected model number)Installation AccessoriesStandard StandardAB ANSI Alignment Ring (150#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes) ★AC ANSI Alignment Ring (300#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes) ★AD ANSI Alignment Ring (600#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes) ★DG DIN Alignment Ring (PN16) ★DH DIN Alignment Ring (PN40) ★DJ DIN Alignment Ring (PN100) ★ExpandedJB JIS Alignment Ring (10K)JR JIS Alignment Ring (20K)JS JIS Alignment Ring (40K)Remote AdaptersStandard StandardFE Flange Adapters 316 SST (1/2-in NPT) ★High Temperature ApplicationExpandedHT Graphite Valve Packing (Tmax = 850 °F)Flow CalibrationExpandedWC(3) Flow Calibration Certification (3 point)WD(3) Discharge Coefficient Verification (full 10 point)Pressure Testing Table 4. Rosemount 3051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
114Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataExpandedP1 Hydrostatic Testing with CertificateSpecial CleaningExpandedP2 Cleaning for Special ServicesPA Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4)Special InspectionStandard StandardQC1 Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate ★QC7 Inspection and Performance Certificate ★Transmitter Calibration CertificationStandard StandardQ4 Calibration Certificate for Transmitter ★Material Traceability CertificationStandard StandardQ8 Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1 ★Code ConformanceExpandedJ2 ANSI/ASME B31.1J3 ANSI/ASME B31.3J4 ANSI/ASME B31.8Materials ConformanceExpandedJ5(4) NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156Country CertificationExpandedJ1 Canadian RegistrationProduct CertificationsStandard StandardI1 ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust ★I2 INMETRO Intrinsic Safety ★I3 China Intrinsic Safety ★I5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ★I7 IECEx Intrinsic Safety ★Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring OptionsStandard StandardL2 Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring ★Display and Interface OptionsStandard StandardM5 LCD Display ★Manifold for Remote Mount OptionStandard StandardF2 3-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel ★F6 5-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel ★Configuration ButtonsStandard StandardDZ Digitial Zero Trim ★Typical Model Number: 3051CFC D C S 060 N 065 0 3 2 A A 1 WC E5 M5(1)Not available for Primary Element Technology C.(2)For 2-in. (50 mm) line sizes the Primary Element Type is 0.6 for Primary Element Technology Code C. Table 4. Rosemount 3051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
115Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference Data(3)Not available with Primary Element Technology P.(4)Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limitsapply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
116Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataRosemount 3051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Table 5. Rosemount 3051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.Model Product Description3051CFP Integral Orifice FlowmeterMeasurement TypeStandard StandardDDifferential Pressure ★Body MaterialStandard StandardS316 SST ★Line SizeStandard Standard005 1/2-in. (15 mm) ★010 1-in. (25 mm) ★015 11/2-in. (40 mm) ★Process ConnectionStandard StandardT1 NPT Female Body (Not Available with Remote Thermowell and RTD) ★S1(1) Socket Weld Body (Not Available with Remote Thermowell and RTD) ★P1 Pipe Ends: NPT Threaded ★P2 Pipe ends: Beveled ★D1 Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN16, slip-on ★D2 Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN40, slip-on ★D3 Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN100, slip-on ★W1 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, weld-neck ★W3 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, weld-neck ★W6 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, weld-neck ★ExpandedA1 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, slip-onA3 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, slip-onA6 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, slip-onR1 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 150, slip-onR3 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 300, slip-onR6 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 600, slip-onOrifice Plate MaterialStandard StandardAdditional InformationDimensional Drawings: page 93
117Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataS316 SST ★ExpandedHAlloy C-276MAlloy 400Bore Size OptionStandard Standard0066 0.066-in. (1.68 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe ★0109 0.109-in. (2.77 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe ★0160 0.160-in. (4.06 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe ★0196 0.196-in. (4.98 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe ★0260 0.260-in. (6.60 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe ★0340 0.340-in. (8.64 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe ★0150 0.150-in. (3.81 mm) for 1-in. Pipe ★0250 0.250-in. (6.35 mm) for 1-in. Pipe ★0345 0.345-in. (8.76 mm) for 1-in. Pipe ★0500 0.500-in. (12.70 mm) for 1-in. Pipe ★0630 0.630-in. (16.00 mm) for 1-in. Pipe ★0800 0.800-in. (20.32 mm) for 1-in. Pipe ★0295 0.295-in. (7.49 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe ★0376 0.376-in. (9.55 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe ★0512 0.512-in. (13.00 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe ★0748 0.748-in. (19.00 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe ★1022 1.022-in. (25.96 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe ★1184 1.184-in. (30.07 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe ★Expanded0010 0.010-in. (0.25 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe0014 0.014-in. (0.36 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe0020 0.020-in. (0.51 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe0034 0.034-in. (0.86 mm) for 1/2-in. PipeTransmitter Connection PlatformStandard StandardD3 Direct-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, SST ★D5 Direct-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, SST ★R3 Remote-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, SST ★R5 Remote-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, SST ★ExpandedD4 Direct-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276D6 Direct-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276D7 Direct-mount, High Temperature, 5-Valve Manifold, SSTR4 Remote-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276R6 Remote-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276Differential Pressure RangesStandard Standard10 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar) ★20 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar) ★ Table 5. Rosemount 3051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
118Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference Data30 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar) ★Transmitter OutputStandard StandardXWireless ★Transmitter Housing Material Conduit Entry SizeStandard StandardPEngineered polymer No conduit entries ★Transmitter Performance ClassStandard Standard1up to ±1.75% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-year stability ★Wireless options (Requires option code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P)Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and ProtocolStandardWA3 User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHARTPlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality StandardWP5 Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)Options (Include with selected model number)Transmitter Body / Bolt MaterialExpandedGT High Temperature (850 °F / 454 °C)Temperature SensorExpandedRT(2) Thermowell and RTDOptional ConnectionStandard StandardG1 DIN 19213 Transmitter Connection ★Pressure TestingExpandedP1(3) Hydrostatic Testing with CertificateSpecial CleaningExpandedP2 Cleaning for Special ServicesPA Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4)Material TestingExpandedV1 Dye Penetrant ExamMaterial ExaminationExpandedV2 Radiographic ExaminationFlow CalibrationExpandedWD(4) Discharge Coefficient Verification Table 5. Rosemount 3051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
119Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataSpecial InspectionStandard StandardQC1 Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate ★QC7 Inspection and Performance Certificate ★Material Traceability CertificationStandard StandardQ8 Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1 ★Code ConformanceExpandedJ2(5) ANSI/ASME B31.1J3(5) ANSI/ASME B31.3J4(5) ANSI/ASME B31.8Materials ConformanceExpandedJ5(6) NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156Country CertificationStandard StandardJ6 European Pressure Directive (PED) ★ExpandedJ1 Canadian RegistrationTransmitter Calibration CertificationStandard StandardQ4 Calibration Certificate for Transmitter ★Product CertificationsStandard StandardI1 ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust ★I2 INMETRO Intrinsic Safety ★I3 China Intrinsic Safety ★I5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ★I7 IECEx Intrinsic Safety ★Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring OptionsStandard StandardL2 Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring ★Display and Interface OptionsStandard StandardM5 LCD Display ★Configuration ButtonsStandard StandardDZ Digital Zero Trim ★Typical Model Number: 3051CFP D S 010 W1 S 0500 D3 2 A A 1 E5 M5(1)To improve pipe perpendicularity for gasket sealing, socket diameter is smaller than standard pipe O.D.(2)Thermowell Material is the same as the body material.(3)Does not apply to Process Connection codes T1 and S1.(4)Not available for bore sizes 0010, 0014, 0020, or 0034.(5)Not available with DIN Process Connection codes D1, D2, or D3. Table 5. Rosemount 3051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
120Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference Data(6)Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
121Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataA.5.5 Rosemount 3051L Level TransmitterThis ordering table contains the following Rosemount 3051L configurations:See Options for more details on each configuration. Additional InformationDimensional Drawings: page 93Configuration Transmitter Output Code4-20 mA HART®-3051-Enhanced 3051(1)(1)The enhanced 4-20 mA HART device can be ordered with Transmitter Output option code A plus any of the following new option codes: DA0, M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7.AFOUNDATION™ fieldbus FProfibus W Table 6. Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.Model Transmitter Type3051L Level TransmitterPressure RangeStandard Standard2–250 to 250 inH2O (–0,6 to 0,6 bar) ★3–1000 to 1000 inH2O (–2,5 to 2,5 bar) ★4–300 to 300 psi (–20,7 to 20,7 bar) ★Transmitter OutputStandard StandardXWireless ★Process Connection Size, Material, Extension length (High Side)Standard StandardCode Process Connection Size Material Extension LengthG0(1) 2-in./DN 50/A 316L SST Flush Mount Only ★H0(1) 2-in./DN 50 Alloy C-276 Flush Mount Only ★J0 2-in./DN 50 Tantalum Flush Mount Only ★A0(1) 3-in./DN 80 316L SST Flush Mount ★A2(1) 3-in./DN 80 316L SST 2-in./50 mm ★A4(1) 3-in./DN 80 316L SST 4-in./100 mm ★Standard StandardCode Process Connection Size Material Extension LengthA6(1) 3-in./DN 80 316L SST 6-in./150 mm ★B0(1) 4-in./DN 100 316L SST Flush Mount ★B2(1) 4-in./DN 100 316L SST 2-in./50 mm ★3051L Level Transmitter
122Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataB4(1) 4-in./DN 100 316L SST 4-in./100 mm ★B6(1) 4-in./DN 100 316L SST 6-in./150 mm ★C0(1) 3-in./DN 80 Alloy C-276 Flush Mount ★C2(1) 3-in./DN 80 Alloy C-276 2-in./50 mm ★C4(1) 3-in./DN 80 Alloy C-276 4-in./100 mm ★C6(1) 3-in./DN 80 Alloy C-276 6-in./150 mm ★D0(1) 4-in./DN 100 Alloy C-276 Flush Mount ★D2(1) 4-in./DN 100 Alloy C-276 2-in./50 mm ★D4(1) 4-in./DN 100 Alloy C-276 4-in./100 mm ★D6(1) 4-in./DN 100 Alloy C-276 6-in./150 mm ★E0 3-in./DN 80 Tantalum Flush Mount Only ★F0 4-in./DN 100 Tantalum Flush Mount Only ★Mounting Flange Size, Rating, Material (High Side)Size Rating MaterialStandard StandardM2-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 CS ★A3-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 CS ★B4-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 CS ★N2-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 CS ★C3-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 CS ★D4-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 CS ★P2-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 CS ★E3-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 CS ★X(1) 2-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 SST ★F(1) 3-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 SST ★G(1) 4-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 SST ★Y(1) 2-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 SST ★H(1) 3-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 SST ★J(1) 4-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 SST ★Z(1) 2-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 SST ★L(1) 3-in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 SST ★QDN 50 PN 10-40 per EN 1092-1 CS ★RDN 80 PN 40 per EN 1092-1 CS ★SDN 100 PN 40 per EN 1092-1 CS ★VDN 100 PN 10/16 per EN 1092-1 CS ★K(1) DN 50 PN 10-40 per EN 1092-1 SST ★T(1) DN 80 PN 40 per EN 1092-1 SST ★U(1) DN 100 PN 40 per EN 1092-1 SST ★W(1) DN 100 PN 10/16 per EN 1092-1 SST ★7(1) 4 in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 SST ★Expanded1 — 10K per JIS B2238 CS2 — 20K per JIS B2238 CS3 — 40K per JIS B2238 CS Table 6. Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
123Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference Data4(1) —10K per JIS B2238 316 SST5(1) —20K per JIS B2238 316 SST6(1) —40K per JIS B2238 316 SSTSeal Fill Fluid (High Side) Specific GravityTemperature Limits (Ambient Temperature of 70° F (21° C))Standard StandardASyltherm XLT 0.85 -102 to 293 °F (-75 to 145 °C) ★CSilicone 704 1.07 32 to 401 °F (0 to 205 °C) ★DSilicone 200 0.93 -49 to 401 °F (-45 to 205 °C) ★HInert (Halocarbon) 1.85 -49 to 320 °F (-45 to 160 °C) ★GGlycerine and Water1.13 5 to 203 °F (-15 to 95 °C) ★NNeobee M-20 0.92 5 to 401 °F (-15 to 205 °C) ★PPropylene Glycol and Water1.02 5 to 203 F (-15 to 95 °C) ★Low Pressure Side ConfigurationFlange Adapter Diaphragm Material Sensor Fill FluidStandard Standard11(1) Gage SST 316L SST Silicone ★21(1) Differential SST 316L SST Silicone ★22(1) Differential SST Alloy C-276 Silicone ★2A(1) Differential SST 316L SST Inert (Halocarbon) ★2B(1) Differential SST Alloy C-276 Inert (Halocarbon) ★31(1) Tuned-System Assembly with Remote SealNone 316L SST Silicone (Requires Option Code S1) ★O-ringStandard StandardAGlass-filled PTFE ★Housing Material Conduit Entry SizeStandard StandardPEngineered polymer No conduit entries ★Wireless options (Requires option code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P)Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and ProtocolStandard StandardWA3 User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART ★Antenna and SmartPowerStandard StandardWP5 Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) ★Options (Include with selected model number)Seal Assemblies Table 6. Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
124Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataStandard StandardS1(2) Assembled to One Rosemount 1199 Seal (Requires 1199M) ★Product CertificationsStandard StandardI1 ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust ★I2 INMETRO Intrinsic Safety ★I3 China Intrinsic Safety ★I5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ★I7 IECEx Intrinsic Safety ★Bolting MaterialStandard StandardL4 Austenitic 316 SST Bolts ★L5 ASTM A 193, Grade B7M bolts ★L6 Alloy K-500 Bolts ★L8 ASTM A 193 Class 2, Grade B8M Bolts ★Display and Interface OptionsStandard StandardM5 LCD Display ★Calibration CertificationStandard StandardQ4 Calibration Certificate ★QP Calibration Certificate and tamper evident seal ★QG Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate ★Material Traceability CertificationStandard StandardQ8 Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1 ★Toolkit Total System Performance ReportsStandard StandardQZ Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report ★Configuration ButtonsStandard StandardDZ Digital Zero Trim ★Lower Housing Flushing Connection OptionsRing Material Number Size (NPT)Standard StandardF1 316 SST 11/4-18 NPT ★F2 316 SST 21/4-18 NPT ★F3 Alloy C-276 11/4-18 NPT ★F4 Alloy C-276 21/4-18 NPT ★F7 316 SST 11/2-14 NPT ★ Table 6. Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
125Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataF8 316 SST 21/2-14 NPT ★F9 Alloy C-276 11/2-14 NPT ★F0 Alloy C-276 21/2-14 NPT ★Typical Model Number: 3051L 2 A A0 D 21 A A F1(1)Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements highlighted within NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.(2)“Assemble-to” items are specified separately and require a completed model number. Table 6. Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter Ordering Information★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
126Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataA.6 OptionsStandard configurationUnless otherwise specified, transmitter is shipped as follows:Custom configurationIf Option Code C1 is ordered, the customer may specify the following data in addition to the standard configuration parameters.Output InformationTransmitter InformationLCD Display ConfigurationHardware Selectable InformationSignal Selection Refer to the “Rosemount Enhanced 3051 Configuration Data Sheet” document number 00806-0100-4007.Tagging (3 options available)Standard SST hardware tag is wired to the transmitter. Tag character height is 0.125 in. (3,18 mm), 56 characters maximum.Tag may be permanently stamped on transmitter nameplate upon request, 56 characters maximum.Tag may be stored in transmitter memory. Character limit is dependent on protocol.–- WirelessHART: 32 charactersOptional Rosemount 304, 305, or 306 Integral ManifoldsFactory assembled to 3051C and 3051T transmitters. Refer to the following Product Data Sheet (document number 00813-0100-4839 for Rosemount 304 and 00813-0100-4733 for Rosemount 305 and 306) for additional information.Engineering unitsDifferential/Gage:Absolute/3051TA: inH2O (Range 0, 1, 2, and 3)psi (Range 4 and 5)psi (all ranges)Low Limit: 0 (engineering units above)High Limit: Upper range limitOutput: LinearFlange type: Specified model code optionFlange material: Specified model code optionO-ring material: Specified model code optionDrain/vent: Specified model code optionLCD Display: Installed or noneAlarm: HighSoftware tag: (Blank)
127Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataOther sealsRefer to Product Data Sheet 00813-0100-4016 for additional information.Output informationOutput range points must be the same unit of measure. Available units of measure include:Display and interface optionsDigital display option provides diagnostic messages for local troubleshooting and has 90 degree rotation capability for easy viewing.M5 Digital Display 2-Line, 5-Digit LCD for 4-20 mA HART Configuration buttonsThe 3051 Wireless transmitter comes with a Digital Zero installed with the LCD digital display.Bolts for flanges and adaptersOptions permit bolts for flanges and adapters to be obtained in various materialsStandard material is plated carbon steel per ASTM A449, Type 1Pressureatm inH2O@4 °C g/cm2psimbar mmH2Okg/cm2torrbar mmHg Pa cmH20@4 °CinH20mmH2O@4 °C kPa cmHG@0 °CinHg ftH20MPa ftH20@60 °FhPa inH20@60 °F kg/SqM mH20@4 °CmHg@0 °C Psf ftH2O@4 °C
128Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataL4 Austenitic 316 Stainless Steel BoltsL5 ASTM A 193, Grade B7M Bolts L6 Alloy K-500 BoltsRosemount 3051C Coplanar Flange and 3051T bracket optionB4 Bracket for 2-in. Pipe or Panel MountingFor use with the standard Coplanarflange configurationBracket for mounting of transmitter on 2-in. pipe or panelStainless steel construction with stainless steel boltsRosemount 3051C Traditional Flange bracket optionsB1 Bracket for 2-in. Pipe MountingFor use with the traditional flange optionBracket for mounting on 2-in. pipeCarbon steel construction with carbonsteel boltsCoated with polyurethane paintB2 Bracket for Panel MountingFor use with the traditional flange optionBracket for mounting transmitter on wallor panelCarbon steel construction with carbonsteel boltsCoated with polyurethane paintB3 Flat Bracket for 2-in. Pipe MountingFor use with the traditional flange optionBracket for vertical mounting of transmitter on 2-in. pipeCarbon steel construction with carbonsteel boltsCoated with polyurethane paintB7 B1 Bracket with SST BoltsSame bracket as the B1 option with Series 300 stainless steel boltsB8 B2 Bracket with SST BoltsSame bracket as the B2 option with Series 300 stainless steel boltsB9 B3 Bracket with SST BoltsSame bracket as the B3 option with Series 300 stainless steel bolts
129Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataBA Stainless Steel B1 Bracket with SST BoltsB1 bracket in stainless steel with Series 300 stainless steel boltsBC Stainless Steel B3 Bracket with SST BoltsB3 bracket in stainless steel with Series 300 stainless steel boltsShipping weights Table 7. Transmitter weights without options Table 8. 3051L weights without optionsTransmitter Add weight In lb (kg)3051C 3.9 (1,8)3051L Table 83051T 2.3 (1,0)FlangeFlushlb. (kg)2-in. Ext.lb (kg)4-in. Ext.lb (kg)6-in. Ext.lb (kg)2-in., 150 12.5 (5,7) ———3-in., 150 17.5 (7,9) 19.5 (8,8) 20.5 (9,3) 21.5 (9,7)4-in., 150 23.5 (10,7) 26.5 (12,0) 28.5 (12,9) 30.5 (13,8)2-in., 300 17.5 (7,9) ———3-in., 300 22.5 (10,2) 24.5 (11,1) 25.5 (11,6) 26.5 (12,0)4-in., 300 32.5 (14,7) 35.5 (16,1) 37.5 (17,0) 39.5 (17,9)2-in., 600 15.3 (6,9) ———3-in., 600 25.2 (11,4) 27.2 (12,3) 28.2 (12,8) 29.2 (13,2)DN 50/PN 40 13.8 (6,2) ———DN 80/PN 40 19.5 (8,8) 21.5 (9,7) 22.5 (10,2) 23.5 (10,6)DN 100/PN 10/16 17.8 (8,1) 19.8 (9,0) 20.8 (9,5) 21.8 (9,9)DN 100/PN 40 23.2 (10,5) 25.2 (11,5) 26.2 (11,9) 27.2 (12,3)
130Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference Data Table 9. Transmitter options weightsCode OptionAddlb (kg)J, K, L, M Stainless Steel Housing(T) 3.9 (1,8)J, K, L, M Stainless Steel Housing (C, L, H, P) 3.1 (1,4)M5 LCD Display for Aluminum Housing 0.5 (0,2)M6 LCD Display for SST Housing 1.25 (0,6)B4 SST Mounting Bracket for Coplanar Flange 1.0 (0,5)B1 B2 B3 Mounting Bracket for Traditional Flange 2.3 (1,0)B7 B8 B9 Mounting Bracket for Traditional Flange 2.3 (1,0)BA, BC SST Bracket for Traditional Flange 2.3 (1,0)H2 Traditional Flange 2.4 (1,1)H3 Traditional Flange 2.7 (1,2)H4 Traditional Flange 2.6 (1,2)H7 Traditional Flange 2.5 (1,1)FC Level Flange—3 in., 150 10.8 (4,9)FD Level Flange—3 in., 300 14.3 (6,5)FA Level Flange—2 in., 150 10.7 (4,8)FB Level Flange—2 in., 300 14.0 (6,3)FP DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 50, PN 40 8.3 (3,8)FQ DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 80, PN 40 13.7 (6,2)
131Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataA.7 Spare partsModel 3051C Sensor Modules (Min. Span/Range)Silicone FillPart NumberNote: One spare part is recommended for every 50 transmitters.Note: Listed by Range and Process Isolator Order Numbers.–3 to 3/0.1 inH2O, Range 0 (includes Traditional SST flange and SST bolts).316L SST 03031-1045-0002–25 to 25 inH2O/0.5 inH2O, Range 1316L SST 03031-1045-0012Alloy C-276 03031-1045-0013Alloy 400 03031-1045-0014Gold-plated Alloy 400 03031-1045-0016Gold-plated 316 SST 03031-1045-0017–250 to 250 inH2O/2.5 inH2O, Range 2316L SST 03031-1045-0022Alloy C-276 03031-1045-0023Alloy 400 03031-1045-0024Tantalum 03031-1045-0025Gold-plated Alloy 400 03031-1045-0026Gold-plated 316 SST 03031-1045-0027–1000 to 1000 inH2O/10 inH2O, Range 3316L SST 03031-1045-0032Alloy C-276 03031-1045-0033Alloy 400 03031-1045-0034Tantalum 03031-1045-0035Gold-plated Alloy 400 03031-1045-0036Gold-plated 316 SST 03031-1045-0037–300 to 300 psi/3 psi, Range 4316L SST 03031-1045-2042Alloy C-276 03031-1045-2043Alloy 400 03031-1045-2044Tantalum 03031-1045-2045Gold-plated Alloy 400 03031-1045-2046Gold-plated 316 SST 03031-1045-2047
132Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference Data–2000 to 2000/20 psi, Range 5316L SST 03031-1045-2052Alloy C-276 03031-1045-2053Alloy 400 03031-1045-2054Tantalum 03031-1045-2055Gold-plated Alloy 400 03031-1045-2056Gold-plated 316 SST 03031-1045-2057Rosemount 3051C gage and differential sensor modules (Min. Span/Range)Silicone fillPart numberNote: One spare part is recommended for every 50 transmitters.Note: Listed by Range and Process Isolator Order Numbers.Gage pressure range Differential pressure rangeRange 1 –25 to 25 in H2O/0.5 in H2O –25 to 25 in H2O/0.5 in H2O316L SST 03031-1045-0012Alloy C-276 03031-1045-0013Alloy 400 03031-1045-0014Gold-plated Alloy 400 03031-1045-0016Gold-plated 316 SST 03031-1045-0017 Range 2 –250 to 250 inH2O/2.5 inH2O–250 to 250 inH2O/2.5 inH2O316L SST 03031-1045-0022Alloy C-276 03031-1045-0023Alloy 400 03031-1045-0024Tantalum 03031-1045-0025Gold-plated Alloy 400 03031-1045-0026Gold-plated 316 SST 03031-1045-0027Range 3 –407 to 1000 inH2O/10 inH2O-1000 to 1000 inH2O/10 inH2O316L SST 03031-1045-0032Alloy C-276 03031-1045-0033Alloy 400 03031-1045-0034Tantalum 03031-1045-0035Gold-plated Alloy 400 03031-1045-0036Gold-plated 316 SST 03031-1045-0037
133Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataRange 4 –14.2 to 300 psi/3 psi -300 to 300 psi/3 psi316L SST 03031-1045-2042Alloy C-276 03031-1045-2043Alloy 400 03031-1045-2044Tantalum 03031-1045-2045Gold-plated Alloy 400 03031-1045-2046Gold-plated 316 SST 03031-1045-2047Range 5 –14.2 to 2000 psi/20 psi -2000 to 2000psi/20 psi316L SST 03031-1045-2052Alloy C-276 03031-1045-2053Alloy 400 03031-1045-2054Tantalum 03031-1045-2055Gold-plated Alloy 400 03031-1045-2056Gold-plated 316 SST 03031-1045-2057Rosemount 3051C absolute sensor modules (Min. Span/Range)Silicone fillPart numberNote: One spare part is recommended for every 50 transmitters.Note: Listed by Range and Process Isolator Order Numbers.Range 1, 0 to 30 psia/0.3 psia316L SST 03031-2020-0012Alloy C-276 03031-2020-0013Alloy 400 03031-2020-0014Gold-plated Alloy 400 03031-2020-0016Gold-plated 316 SST 03031-2020-0017Range 2, 0 to 150/1.5 psia 316L SST 03031-2020-0022Alloy C-276 03031-2020-0023Alloy 400 03031-2020-0024Gold-plated Alloy 400 03031-2020-0026Gold-plated 316 SST 03031-2020-0027Range 3, 0 to 800 psia/8 psia316L SST 03031-2020-0032Alloy C-276 03031-2020-0033Alloy 400 03031-2020-0034Gold-plated Alloy 400 03031-2020-0036Gold-plated 316 SST 03031-2020-0037
134Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataRange 4, 0 to 400 psia/40 psia316L SST 03031-2020-0042Alloy C-276 03031-2020-0043Alloy 400 03031-2020-0044Gold-plated Alloy 400 03031-2020-0046Gold-plated 316 SST 03031-2020-0047Rosemount 3051T Sensor Modules (Min. Span/Range)Silicone FillPart NumberNote: One spare part is recommended for every 50 transmitters.Range 1Gage pressure range0-0.3/30 psigAluminum, 316L SST Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3112-31121/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-3112G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male 03031-3132-3112Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3112-31131/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-3113SST, 316L SST Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3111-31121/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3112SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3111-31131/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3113Range 2 0-1.5/150 psigAluminum, 316L SST Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3112-31221/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-3122G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male 03031-3132-3122Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3112-31221/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-3122G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male 03031-3132-3122
135Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataAluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3112-31231/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-3123SST, 316L SST Isolator¼ –18 NPT Female 03031-3111-31221/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3122SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3111-31231/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3123Range 3 0-8/800 psigAluminum, 316L SST Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3112-31321/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-3132G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male 03031-3132-3132Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3112-31331/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-3133SST, 316L SST Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3111-31321/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3132SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3111-31331/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3133Range4 0-40/4,000 psigAluminum, 316L SST Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3112-31421/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-3142G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male 03031-3132-3142Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3112-31431/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-3143SST, 316L SST Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3111-31421/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3142SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3111-31431/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3143
136Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataRange 1Gage pressure range0-0.3/30 psiaAluminum, 316L SST Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3112-30121/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-1012G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male 03031-3132-3012Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3112-30131/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-3013SST, 316L SST Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3111-30121/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3012SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3111-30131/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3013Range 2 0-1.5/150 psiaAluminum, 316L SST Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3112-30221/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3112-3022G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male 03031-3132-3022Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3112-30231/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-3023SST, 316L SST Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3111-30221/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3022SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator1/4–18 NPT Female 03031-3111-30231/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3023Range 3 0-8/800 psiaAluminum, 316L SST Isolator1/4–18 NPT Female 03031-3112-30321/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-3032G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male 03031-3132-3032Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3112-30331/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-3033
137Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataSST, 316L SST Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3111-30321/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3032SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3111-30331/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3033Range 4 0-40/4,000 psiaAluminum, 316L SST Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3112-30421/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-3042G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male 03031-3132-3042Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3112-30431/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-3043SST, 316L SST Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3111-30421/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3042SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3111-30431/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3043Range 5 0-2000/10,000 psiaAluminum, 316L SST Isolator1/4–18 NPT Female 03031-3112-30521/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-3052Autoclave type F-250-C 03031-3122-3052Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3112-30531/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3102-3053SST, 316L SST Isolator1/4 –18 NPT Female 03031-3111-30521/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3052Autoclave type F-250-C 03031-3121-3052SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator1/4–18 NPT Female 03031-3111-30531/2 –14 NPT Female 03031-3101-3053
138Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataLCD Display Part numberLCD Display for 3051 Wireless with Polymer HousingLCD Display for 3051 WirelessHART 03151-9010-0001Electrical housings Part numberStandard - PolymerEngineered PolymerHousing covers (include o-ring) Part numberWireless Battery Cover - PolymerLCD Display Cover - PolymerFlanges Part numberDifferential Coplanar Flange316 SST 03031-0388-0022Cast Alloy C-276 03031-0388-0023Cast Alloy 400 03031-0388-0024Nickel-plated carbon steel 03031-0388-0025Gage/Absolute Coplanar Flange316 SST 03031-0388-1022Cast Alloy C-276 03031-0388-1023Cast Alloy 400 03031-0388-1024Nickel-plated carbon steel 03031-0388-1025Coplanar flange alignment screw (package of 12) 03031-0309-0001Traditional Flange316 SST 03031-0320-0002Cast Alloy C-276 03031-0320-0003Cast Alloy 400 03031-0320-0004316 SST - DIN Compliant (Option Code HJ) 03031-1350-0012Level Flange, Vertical Mount2 in., class 150, SST 03031-0393-02212 in., class 300, SST 03031-0393-02223 in., class 150, SST 03031-0393-02313 in., class 300, SST 03031-0393-0232DIN, DN 50, PN 40 03031-0393-1002DIN, DN 80, PN 40 03031-0393-1012
139Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataFlange adapter kits (each kit contains parts for one DP transmitter or two GP/AP transmitters) Part numberCS bolts, glass-filled PTFE O-RingsSST adapters 03031-1300-0002Cast Alloy C-276 adapters 03031-1300-0003Alloy 400 adapters 03031-1300-0004Nickel-plated carbon steel adapters 03031-1300-0005SST bolts, glass-filled PTFE O-RingsSST adapters 03031-1300-0012Cast Alloy C-276 adapters 03031-1300-0013Alloy 400 adapters 03031-1300-0014Nickel-plated carbon steel adapters 03031-1300-0015CS bolts, graphite-filled PTFE O-RingsSST adapters 03031-1300-0102Cast Alloy C-276 adapters 03031-1300-0103Alloy 400 adapters 03031-1300-0104Nickel-plated carbon steel adapters 03031-1300-0105SST bolts, graphite-filled PTFE O-RingsSST adapters 03031-1300-0112Cast Alloy C-276 adapters 03031-1300-0113Alloy 400 adapters 03031-1300-0114Nickel-plated carbon steel adapters 03031-1300-0115Flange adapters Part number1/2 - 14 NPT Adapters316 SST 02024-0069-0002Cast Alloy C-276 02024-0069-0003Cast Alloy 400 02024-0069-0004Nickel-plated carbon steel 02024-0069-0005Socket Weld Adapters316 SST 02024-0069-1002Cast Alloy C-276 02024-0069-1003Cast Alloy 400 02024-0069-1004
140Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataO-Ring packages (package of 12) Part numberElectronics housing, cover 03031-0232-0001Electronics housing, module 03031-0233-0001Process flange, glass-filled PTFE (White) 03031-0234-0001Process flange, graphite-filled PTFE (Black) 03031-0234-0002Flange adapter, glass-filled PTFE (Light Brown) 03031-0242-0001Flange adapter, graphite-filled PTFE (Black) 03031-0242-0002Bolt kits Part numberCOPLANAR FLANGEFlange Bolt Kit {44mm (1.75 in.)} (set of 4)Carbon steel 03031-0312-0001316 SST 03031-0312-0002ASTM A 193, Grade B7M 03031-0312-0003Alloy K-500 03031-0312-0004Flange/Adapter Bolt Kit {73mm (2.88 in.)} (set of 4)Carbon steel 03031-0306-0001316 SST 03031-0306-0002ASTM A 193, Grade B7M 03031-0306-0003Alloy K-500 03031-0306-0004TRADITIONAL FLANGEDifferential Flange/Adapter Bolt Kit {44mm (1.75 in.)} (set of 8)Carbon steel 03031-0307-0001316 SST 03031-0307-0002ASTM A 193, Grade B7M 03031-0307-0003Alloy K-500 03031-0307-0004Gage/Absolute Flange/Adapter Bolt Kit {44mm (1.75 in.)} (set of 6)Carbon steel 03031-0307-1001316 SST 03031-0307-1002ASTM A 193, Grade B7M 03031-0307-1003Alloy K-500 03031-0307-1004Conventional Manifold/Traditional Flange BoltsCarbon steel Use bolts supplied with manifold316 SST Use bolts supplied with manifoldLevel Flange, Vertical Mount Bolt Kit (Set of 4)Carbon steel 03031-0395-0001316 SST 03031-0395-0002
141Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference DataDrain/Vent valve kits (each kit contains parts for one transmitter) Part numberDifferential Drain/Vent Kits316 SST stem and seat kit 01151-0028-0022Alloy C-276 stem and seat kit 01151-0028-0023Alloy K-500 stem and Alloy 400 seat kit 01151-0028-0024316 SST ceramic ball drain/vent kit 03031-0378-0022Alloy C-276 ceramic ball drain/vent kit 03031-0378-0023 Alloy 400/K-500 ceramic ball drain/vent kit 03031-0378-0024 Gage/Absolute Drain/Vent Kits316 SST stem and seat kit 01151-0028-0012Alloy C-276 stem and seat kit 01151-0028-0013Alloy K-500 stem and Alloy 400 seat kit 01151-0028-0014316 SST ceramic ball drain/vent kit 03031-0378-0012Alloy C-276 ceramic ball drain/vent kit 03031-0378-0013 Alloy 400/K-500 ceramic ball drain/vent kit 03031-0378-0014Mounting brackets Part number3051C and 3051L Coplanar Flange Bracket kitB4 bracket, SST, 2-in. pipe mount, SST bolts 03031-0189-00033051T Inline Bracket KitB4 bracket, SST, 2-in. pipe mount, SST bolts 03031-0189-00043051C Traditional Flange Bracket KitsB1 bracket, 2-in. pipe mount, CS bolts 03031-0313-0001B2 bracket, panel mount, CS bolts 03031-0313-0002B3 flat bracket, 2-in. pipe mount, CS bolts 03031-0313-0003B7 (B1 bracket, SST bolts) 03031-0313-0007B8 (B2 bracket, SST bolts) 03031-0313-0008B9 (B3 bracket, SST bolts) 03031-0313-0009BA (SST B1 bracket, SST bolts) 03031-0313-0011BC (SST B3 bracket, SST bolts) 03031-0313-0013
142Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix A: Specifications and Reference DataJune 2012Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix B: Product CertificationsJune 2012143Product CertificationsAppendix B Product CertificationsWireless Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 143B.1 Wireless CertificationsB.1.1 Approved manufacturing locationsRosemount Inc. — Chanhassen, Minnesota USAFisher-Rosemount GmbH & Co. — Wessling, GermanyEmerson Process Management Asia Pacific Private Limited — SingaporeBeijing Rosemount Far East Instrument Co., LTD — Beijing, ChinaB.1.2 European directive informationThe EC declaration of conformity can be found on . The most recent revision can be found at www.rosemount.com. B.1.3 Telecommunication complianceAll wireless devices require certification to ensure that they adhere to regulations regarding the use of the RF spectrum. Nearly every country requires this type of product certification. Emerson is working with governmental agencies around the world to supply fully compliant products and remove the risk of violating country directives or laws governing wireless device usage. B.1.4 FCC and ICThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 20 cm from all persons.B.1.5 Ordinary location certification for FMAs standard, the transmitter has been examined and tested to determine that the design meets basic electrical, mechanical, and fire protection requirements by FM, a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as accredited by the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
144Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix B: Product CertificationsJune 2012Product CertificationsB.1.6 North American certificationsFactory Mutual (FM) approvalsI5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Non-Incendive, and Dust Ignition-proof.Intrinsically Safe for Class I/II/III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G.Zone Marking: Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia llCTemperature Codes T4 (Tamb = -50 to 70 °C)Non-Incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D.Dust Ignition-proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G.Ambient temperature limits: -50 to 85 °CFor use with Rosemount power module P/N 00753-9220-0001 only.Enclosure Type 4X / IP66/68B.1.7 CSA - Canadian Standards AssociationI6 CSA Intrinsically SafeIntrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D.Temp Code T3CEnclosure Type 4X / IP66/68For use with Rosemount power module P/N 00753-9220-0001 only.B.1.8 European certificationsI1 ATEX Intrinsic SafetyCertificate No.: BAS01ATEX1303X II 1GEx ia IIC T4 (Ta = -60 °C to 70 °C) For use with Rosemount power module options 00753-9220-0001 only.IP66/68 1180Special Conditions for Safe Use (X)The surface resistivity of the antenna is greater than one gigaohm. To avoid electrostatic charge build-up, it must not be rubbed or cleaned with solvents or a dry cloth.I7 IECEx Intrinsic SafetyCertificate No.: IECEx BAS 04.0017XEx ia IIC T4 (Ta = -60 °C to 70 °C) For use with Rosemount power module options 00753-9220-0001 only.IP66/68Special Conditions for Safe Use (X)The surface resistivity of the antenna is greater than one gigaohm. To avoid electrostatic charge build-up, it must not be rubbed or cleaned with solvents or a dry cloth.
145Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix B: Product CertificationsJune 2012Product CertificationsB.1.9 Japanese Certifications I4 TIIS Intrinsic SafetyEx ia IIC T4B.1.10 China (NEPSI) CertificationsI3 China Intrinsic SafetyCertificate No. (manufactured in Chanhassen, MN): GYJ081078 Certificate No. (manufactured in Beijing, China): GYJ06367 Certificate No. (manufactured in Singapore): GYJ06365Ex ia IIC T4Special Conditions for Safe Use (X)See appropriate certificate.Certificate DescriptionTC18649 2051_CD/CG/LD/LGTC18650 2051_CA/TA/TG/LATC18657 2051FA/SFC/SFP
146Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAAppendix B: Product CertificationsJune 2012Product Certifications
Reference Manual00809-0100-4100, Rev AAJune 2012Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale can be found at www.rosemount.com/terms_of_saleThe Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co.Rosemount. the Rosemount logotype, and SMART FAMILY are registered trademarks of Rosemount Inc.Coplanar is a trademark of Rosemount Inc.Halocarbon is a trademark of the Halocarbon Products Corporation.o.Fluorinert is a registered trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company CorporationSyltherm 800 and D.C. 200 are registered trademarks of Dow Corning Corporation.Neobee M-20 is a registered trademark of PVO International, Inc.HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation.Foundation fieldbus is a registered trademark of the Fieldbus Foundation.All other marks are the property of their respective owners.© June 2012 Rosemount, Inc. All rights reserved.Emerson Process Management GmbH & Co.Argelsrieder Feld 382234 WesslingGermanyTel 49 (8153) 9390Fax 49 (8153) 939172Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Private Limited1 Pandan CrescentSingapore 128461T (65) 6777 8211F (65) 6777 0947Enquiries@AP.EmersonProcess.comBeijing Rosemount Far EastInstrument Co., LimitedNo. 6 North Street, Hepingli, Dong Cheng DistrictBeijing 100013, ChinaT (86) (10) 6428 2233F (86) (10) 6422 8586Emerson Process ManagementRosemount Measurement8200 Market BoulevardChanhassen MN 55317 USATel (USA) 1 800 999 9307Tel (International) +1 952 906 8888Fax +1 952 906 8889

Navigation menu